Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: C79000-G8976-C248
Ⓟ 03/2014 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2011 - 2014.
All rights reserved
Table of contents
1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................9
1.1 Information on the configuration manual (WBM)...........................................................................9
1.2 Security information.....................................................................................................................11
2 Description..................................................................................................................................................13
2.1 Product characteristics................................................................................................................13
2.2 Requirements for installation and operation................................................................................15
2.3 C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG..................................................................................................................16
2.4 Power over Ethernet (PoE).........................................................................................................18
3 Assignment of an IP address......................................................................................................................21
3.1 Structure of an IP address...........................................................................................................21
3.2 Initial assignment of an IP address.............................................................................................23
3.3 Address assignment with DHCP.................................................................................................24
4 Technical basics.........................................................................................................................................25
4.1 Configuration limits......................................................................................................................25
4.2 VLAN...........................................................................................................................................27
4.3 VLAN tagging..............................................................................................................................28
4.4 SNMP..........................................................................................................................................30
4.5 Routing function..........................................................................................................................32
4.5.1 VRRP..........................................................................................................................................32
4.5.2 OSPFv2.......................................................................................................................................33
4.5.3 RIPv2...........................................................................................................................................37
4.6 Redundancy mechanism.............................................................................................................39
4.6.1 Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................................39
4.6.1.1 RSTP, MSTP, CIST.....................................................................................................................40
4.6.2 HRP.............................................................................................................................................41
4.6.3 MRP............................................................................................................................................42
4.6.3.1 MRP - Media Redundancy Protocol ...........................................................................................42
4.6.3.2 Configuration in WBM.................................................................................................................44
4.6.3.3 Configuration in STEP 7..............................................................................................................44
4.6.4 Standby.......................................................................................................................................48
4.7 Link aggregation..........................................................................................................................50
5 Configuring with Web Based Management................................................................................................51
5.1 Web Based Management............................................................................................................51
5.2 Login............................................................................................................................................53
5.3 The "Information" menu...............................................................................................................55
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 3
5.3.1 Start page....................................................................................................................................55
5.3.2 Versions......................................................................................................................................59
5.3.3 I&M..............................................................................................................................................60
5.3.4 ARP table....................................................................................................................................61
5.3.5 Log table......................................................................................................................................62
5.3.6 Faults...........................................................................................................................................65
5.3.7 Redundancy................................................................................................................................66
5.3.7.1 Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................................66
5.3.7.2 VRRP Statistics...........................................................................................................................69
5.3.7.3 Ring redundancy.........................................................................................................................71
5.3.7.4 Standby redundancy...................................................................................................................73
5.3.8 Ethernet statistics........................................................................................................................75
5.3.8.1 Interface statistics........................................................................................................................75
5.3.8.2 Packet size..................................................................................................................................76
5.3.8.3 Packet type..................................................................................................................................77
5.3.8.4 Packet Error................................................................................................................................78
5.3.8.5 History.........................................................................................................................................80
5.3.9 Unicast........................................................................................................................................81
5.3.10 Multicast......................................................................................................................................82
5.3.11 LLDP...........................................................................................................................................84
5.3.12 Routing........................................................................................................................................85
5.3.12.1 Routing Table..............................................................................................................................85
5.3.12.2 OSPFv2 Interfaces......................................................................................................................86
5.3.12.3 OSPFv2 Neighbors.....................................................................................................................88
5.3.12.4 OSPFv2 Virtual Neighbors..........................................................................................................90
5.3.12.5 OSPFv2 LSDB............................................................................................................................92
5.3.12.6 RIPv2 Statistics...........................................................................................................................93
5.4 The "System" menu.....................................................................................................................95
5.4.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................95
5.4.2 General........................................................................................................................................98
5.4.2.1 Device.........................................................................................................................................98
5.4.2.2 Coordinates.................................................................................................................................99
5.4.3 Agent IP.....................................................................................................................................100
5.4.4 DNS...........................................................................................................................................100
5.4.5 Restart.......................................................................................................................................102
5.4.6 Load & Save..............................................................................................................................103
5.4.6.1 HTTP.........................................................................................................................................103
5.4.6.2 TFTP.........................................................................................................................................106
5.4.7 Events.......................................................................................................................................109
5.4.7.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................109
5.4.7.2 Severity Filters...........................................................................................................................112
5.4.8 SMTP client...............................................................................................................................113
5.4.9 DHCP client...............................................................................................................................114
5.4.10 SNMP........................................................................................................................................116
5.4.10.1 General......................................................................................................................................116
5.4.10.2 Traps.........................................................................................................................................117
5.4.10.3 Groups.......................................................................................................................................119
5.4.10.4 Users.........................................................................................................................................121
5.4.11 System time...............................................................................................................................123
5.4.11.1 Manual setting...........................................................................................................................123
5.4.11.2 DST Overview...........................................................................................................................124
5.4.11.3 DST Configuration.....................................................................................................................125
Table of contents
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
4Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.11.4 SNTP client...............................................................................................................................129
5.4.11.5 NTP client..................................................................................................................................132
5.4.11.6 SIMATIC time client...................................................................................................................134
5.4.11.7 PTP Client (SCALANCE XR-500 only)......................................................................................135
5.4.12 Auto logout................................................................................................................................136
5.4.13 Select/Set button configuration.................................................................................................137
5.4.14 Syslog client..............................................................................................................................138
5.4.15 Ports..........................................................................................................................................140
5.4.15.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................140
5.4.15.2 Configuration.............................................................................................................................142
5.4.16 Fault monitoring.........................................................................................................................145
5.4.16.1 Power Supply............................................................................................................................145
5.4.16.2 Link Change..............................................................................................................................146
5.4.16.3 Redundancy..............................................................................................................................148
5.4.17 PNIO..........................................................................................................................................148
5.4.18 PLUG configuration...................................................................................................................149
5.4.19 PLUG license............................................................................................................................152
5.4.20 Ping...........................................................................................................................................155
5.4.21 PoE............................................................................................................................................156
5.4.21.1 General......................................................................................................................................156
5.4.21.2 Port............................................................................................................................................157
5.4.22 Port Diagnostics........................................................................................................................160
5.4.22.1 Cable tester...............................................................................................................................160
5.4.22.2 SFP diagnostics........................................................................................................................162
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu...................................................................................................................164
5.5.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................164
5.5.2 Qos............................................................................................................................................168
5.5.2.1 CoS queue mapping..................................................................................................................168
5.5.2.2 DSCP mapping..........................................................................................................................169
5.5.3 Rate control...............................................................................................................................170
5.5.4 VLAN.........................................................................................................................................172
5.5.4.1 General......................................................................................................................................172
5.5.4.2 GVRP........................................................................................................................................175
5.5.4.3 Port-based VLAN......................................................................................................................177
5.5.4.4 Protocol Based VLAN Group.....................................................................................................179
5.5.4.5 Protocol Based VLAN Port........................................................................................................180
5.5.4.6 lpv4 Subnet Based VLAN..........................................................................................................181
5.5.5 Mirroring....................................................................................................................................182
5.5.5.1 General......................................................................................................................................183
5.5.5.2 Port............................................................................................................................................185
5.5.5.3 VLAN.........................................................................................................................................186
5.5.5.4 MAC Flow..................................................................................................................................187
5.5.5.5 IP Flow......................................................................................................................................188
5.5.6 Dynamic MAC aging..................................................................................................................189
5.5.7 Ring redundancy.......................................................................................................................190
5.5.7.1 Ring redundancy.......................................................................................................................190
5.5.7.2 Standby.....................................................................................................................................192
5.5.8 Spanning tree............................................................................................................................195
5.5.8.1 General......................................................................................................................................195
5.5.8.2 CIST general.............................................................................................................................196
5.5.8.3 CIST port...................................................................................................................................199
5.5.8.4 MST general..............................................................................................................................203
Table of contents
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 5
5.5.8.5 MST port....................................................................................................................................204
5.5.8.6 Enhanced Passive Listening Compatibility................................................................................207
5.5.9 Loop Detection..........................................................................................................................208
5.5.10 Link aggregation........................................................................................................................210
5.5.11 DCP forwarding.........................................................................................................................213
5.5.12 LLDP.........................................................................................................................................215
5.5.13 Unicast......................................................................................................................................217
5.5.13.1 Filtering......................................................................................................................................217
5.5.13.2 Locked ports..............................................................................................................................219
5.5.13.3 Learning....................................................................................................................................220
5.5.13.4 Unicast blocking........................................................................................................................222
5.5.14 Multicast....................................................................................................................................224
5.5.14.1 Groups.......................................................................................................................................224
5.5.14.2 IGMP.........................................................................................................................................226
5.5.14.3 GMRP........................................................................................................................................227
5.5.14.4 Multicast blocking......................................................................................................................229
5.5.15 Broadcast..................................................................................................................................230
5.5.16 PTP (SCALANCE XR-500 only)................................................................................................232
5.5.16.1 General......................................................................................................................................232
5.5.16.2 TC General................................................................................................................................233
5.5.16.3 TC Port......................................................................................................................................233
5.5.17 RMON.......................................................................................................................................235
5.5.17.1 Statistics....................................................................................................................................235
5.5.17.2 History.......................................................................................................................................236
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu...................................................................................................................238
5.6.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................238
5.6.2 Subnets.....................................................................................................................................239
5.6.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................239
5.6.2.2 Configuration.............................................................................................................................242
5.6.3 Routes.......................................................................................................................................243
5.6.4 Route Maps...............................................................................................................................245
5.6.4.1 General......................................................................................................................................245
5.6.4.2 Inferface&Value Match..............................................................................................................246
5.6.4.3 Destination Match......................................................................................................................247
5.6.4.4 Next Hop Match.........................................................................................................................248
5.6.4.5 Set Configuration.......................................................................................................................249
5.6.5 DHCP Relay Agent....................................................................................................................250
5.6.5.1 General......................................................................................................................................250
5.6.5.2 Option........................................................................................................................................251
5.6.6 VRRP........................................................................................................................................254
5.6.6.1 Router........................................................................................................................................254
5.6.6.2 Configuration.............................................................................................................................256
5.6.6.3 Addresses Overview.................................................................................................................258
5.6.6.4 Addresses Configuration...........................................................................................................259
5.6.7 OSPFv2.....................................................................................................................................260
5.6.7.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................260
5.6.7.2 Areas.........................................................................................................................................262
5.6.7.3 Area Range...............................................................................................................................263
5.6.7.4 Interfaces...................................................................................................................................265
5.6.7.5 Interface authentication.............................................................................................................267
5.6.7.6 Virtual Links...............................................................................................................................268
5.6.7.7 Virtual link authentication..........................................................................................................271
Table of contents
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
6Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.6.8 RIPv2.........................................................................................................................................272
5.6.8.1 RIPv2 Configuration..................................................................................................................272
5.6.8.2 RIPv2 Interfaces........................................................................................................................273
5.7 The "Security" menu..................................................................................................................276
5.7.1 Passwords.................................................................................................................................276
5.7.2 AAA...........................................................................................................................................277
5.7.2.1 General......................................................................................................................................277
5.7.2.2 Radius client..............................................................................................................................277
5.7.2.3 802.1x authenticator..................................................................................................................280
5.7.3 Port ACL MAC...........................................................................................................................284
5.7.3.1 Rules Configuration...................................................................................................................284
5.7.3.2 Port Ingress Rules.....................................................................................................................285
5.7.3.3 Port Egress Rules.....................................................................................................................287
5.7.4 Port ACL IP...............................................................................................................................288
5.7.4.1 Rules Configuration...................................................................................................................288
5.7.4.2 Protocol Configuration...............................................................................................................290
5.7.4.3 Port Ingress Rules.....................................................................................................................291
5.7.4.4 Port Egress Rules.....................................................................................................................293
5.7.5 Management ACL.....................................................................................................................294
6 Troubleshooting/FAQ...............................................................................................................................299
6.1 Firmware update via WBM or CLI not possible.........................................................................299
Index.........................................................................................................................................................301
Table of contents
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 7
Introduction 1
1.1 Information on the configuration manual (WBM)
Validity of the configuration manual
This Configuration Manual covers the following products:
● SCALANCE XR-500
– SCALANCE XR552-12M
– SCALANCE XR528-6M
The devices are available with or without routing functions. For the devices without routing
functions, the functions can be enabled by a KEY-PLUG.
● SCALANCE XM-400
– SCALANCE XM408-8C
– SCALANCE XM416-4C
The devices are available with or without routing functions. For the devices without routing
functions, the functions can be enabled by a KEY-PLUG.
This Configuration Manual applies to the following software version:
● SCALANCE XR-500 firmware as of version 4.0
● SCALANCE XM-400 firmware as of version 4.0
Purpose of the Configuration Manual
This Configuration Manual is intended to provide you with the information you require to install,
commission and operate IE switches. It provides you with the information you require to
configure the IE switches.
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 9
Orientation in the documentation
Apart from the configuration manual you are currently reading, the products also have the
following documentation:
● Configuration Manual:
– SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Command Line Interface
This document contains the CLI commands that are supported by the IE switches
SCALANCE XM-400 and SCALANCE X-500.
● Operating instructions:
– SCALANCE XR-500M
– MM900 media modules for SCALANCE XR-500M
– Fan unit FAN597-1 for SCALANCE XR-500M
– Power supply PS598-1 for SCALANCE XR-500M
– SCALANCE XM-400
– Extender for SCALANCE XM-400
These documents contain information on installing and connecting up and approvals for
the products.
The following documentation is also available from SIMATIC NET on the topic of Industrial
Ethernet:
● System manual "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET"
● System manual "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components"
All these documents are available in digital form on the SCALANCE X DVD.
SIMATIC NET glossary
Explanations of many of the specialist terms used in this documentation can be found in the
SIMATIC NET glossary.
You will find the SIMATIC NET glossary here:
● SIMATIC NET Manual Collection or product DVD
The DVD ships with certain SIMATIC NET products.
● On the Internet under the following entry ID:
50305045 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50305045)
Introduction
1.1 Information on the configuration manual (WBM)
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
10 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
1.2 Security information
Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that support
the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a holistic
industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous development.
We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with respect to our product updates.
Please find further information and newsletters on this subject at: http://
support.automation.siemens.com.
To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine it is also necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive
components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or
machine. Any third-party products that may be in use must also be taken into account. Please
find further information at: http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
Introduction
1.2 Security information
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 11
Description 2
2.1 Product characteristics
Properties of the IE switches
● The Ethernet interfaces support the following modes:
– 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps both in full and half duplex
– 1000 Mbps full duplex
– Autocrossing
– Autopolarity
● Redundancy protocols Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) and Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
This means part of a network can be connected redundantly to a higher-level company
network. The reconfiguration time of the network is in the seconds range and therefore
takes longer than the ring redundancy method.
● Virtual networks (VLAN)
To structure Industrial Ethernet networks with a fast growing number of nodes, a physical
network can be divided into several virtual subnets. Port-based, protocol-based and subnet-
based VLANs are available.
● Load limitation when using multicast protocols, for example video transmission
By learning the multicast sources and destinations (IGMP snooping, IGMP querier), the IE
switches can filter multicast data traffic and limit the load in the network. Multicast and
broadcast data traffic can be limited.
● Time-of-day synchronization
Diagnostics messages (log table entries, e-mails) are given a time stamp. The local time
is uniform throughout the network thanks to synchronization with a SICLOCK time
transmitter or SNTP/NTP server and therefore makes the identification of diagnostics
messages of several devices easier.
● Link aggregation (IEEE 802.1AX) for bundling data streams
● Quality of Service for classification of the network traffic is according to COS (Class of
Service - IEEE 802.11Q) and DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point - RFC 2474)
Layer 3 functions
The following functions are only available on devices with routing functions:
● Static routing
● OSPF
● VRRP
● RIP
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 13
The following devices have routing functions:
Device Order number
SCALANCE XM-400 XM408-8C 6GK5 408-8GR00-2AM2
XM416-4C 6GK5 416-4GR00-2AM2
SCALANCE XR-500 XR552-12M 6GK5 552-0AR00-2AR2
6GK5 552-0AR00-2HR2
XR528-6M 6GK5 528-0AR00-2AR2
6GK5 528-0AR00-2HR2
On the devices that only support layer 2, the routing functions can be enabled by a KEY-PLUG.
Description
2.1 Product characteristics
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
14 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
2.2 Requirements for installation and operation
Requirements for installation and operation of the IE switches
A PG/PC with a network connection must be available in order to configure the IE switches. If
no DHCP server is available, a PG/PC on which the Primary Setup Tool (PST) is installed is
necessary for the initial assignment of an IP address to the IE switches. For the other
configuration settings, a PG/PC with Telnet or an Internet browser is necessary.
Serial interface
The IE switches have a serial interface. An IP address is unnecessary to be able to access
the device via the serial interface. A serial cable ships with the products.
Set the following parameters for the connection:
● Bits per second: 115200
● Data bits: 8
● Parity: None
● Stop bits: 1
● Flow control: None
Description
2.2 Requirements for installation and operation
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 15
2.3 C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
Configuration information on the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
The C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG is used to transfer the configuration of the old device to the new
device when a device is replaced.
NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG during operation!
A C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device regularly checks whether or not a KEY-PLUG is present. If it is detected that the
KEY-PLUG was removed, there is a restart. If a valid KEY-PLUG was inserted in the device,
the device changes to a defined error state following the restart.
When the new device starts up with the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG, it then continues automatically
with exactly the same configuration as the old device. One exception to this can be the IP
configuration if it is set over DHCP and the DHCP server has not been reconfigured accordingly.
A reconfiguration is necessary if you use functions based on MAC addresses.
Note
In terms of the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG, the SCALANCE devices work in two modes:
●Without C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
The device stores the configuration in internal memory. This mode is active when no C-
PLUG / KEY-PLUG is inserted.
●With C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
The configuration stored on the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG is displayed over the user
interfaces. If changes are made to the configuration, the device stores the configuration
directly on the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG and in the internal memory. This mode is active as
soon as a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG is inserted. When the device is started with a C-PLUG /
KEY-PLUG inserted, the device starts up with the configuration data on the C-PLUG /
KEY-PLUG.
Note
Incompatibility with previous versions with C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version of the firmware, the configuration data can be
lost. In this case, the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been
installed. In this situation, if a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG is inserted in the device, following the
restart, this has the status "Not Accepted" since the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG still has the
configuration data of the previous more up-to-date firmware. This allows you to return to the
previous, more up-to-date firmware without any loss of configuration data. If the original
configuration on the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG is no longer required, the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
can be deleted or rewritten manually.
Description
2.3 C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
16 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
License information on the KEY-PLUG
In addition to the configuration, the KEY-PLUG also contains a license that allows the use of
layer 3 functions.
Description
2.3 C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 17
2.4 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
General
"Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is a power supply technique for network components according
to IEEE 802.3af or IEEE 802.3at. The power is supplied over the Ethernet cables that connect
the individual network components together. This makes an additional power cable
unnecessary. PoE can be used with all PoE-compliant network components that require a
power of max. 25.50 W.
Cable used for the power supply
●Variant 1 (redundant wires)
In Fast Ethernet, the wire pairs 1, 2 and 3, 6 are used to transfer data. Pairs 4, 5 and 7, 8
are then used to supply power. If there are only four wires available, the voltage is
modulated onto the wires 1, 2 and 3, 6 (see variant 2). This alternative is suitable for a data
transmission rate of 10/100 Mbps. This type of power supply is not suitable for 1 Gbps since
with gigabit all eight wires are used for data transfer.
●Variant 2 (phantom power)
With phantom power, the power is supplied over the pairs that are used for data transfer,
in other words, all eight (1 Gbps) or four (10/100 Mbps) wires are used both for the data
transfer and the power supply.
A PoE-compliant end device must support both variant 1 and variant 2 over redundant wires.
A switch with PoE capability can supply the end device either using
● Variant 1 or
● Variant 2 or
● Variant 1 and variant 2.
Endspan
With endspan, the power is supplied via a switch that can reach a device over an Ethernet
cable. The switch must be capable of PoE, for example a SCALANCE X108PoE, SCALANCE
X308-2M PoE, all SCALANCE XM-400 switches with PE408PoE, SCALANCE XR552‑12M.
Midspan
Midspan is used when the switch is not PoE-compliant. The power is supplied by an additional
device between the switch and end device. In this case, only data rates of 10/100 Mbps can
be achieved because the power is supplied on redundant wires.
Description
2.4 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
18 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
A Siemens power insert can also be used as the interface for the power input. Since a power
insert supports a power supply of 24 VDC, it does not conform with 802.3af or IEEE 802.3at.
The following restrictions relating to the use of power inserts should be noted:
WARNING
Operate the power insert only when the following conditions apply:
● with extra low voltages SELV, PELV complying with IEC 60364-4-41
● in USA/CAN with power supplies complying with NEC class 2
● in USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of NEC/CEC
● Current load maximum 0.5 A
Cable lengths
Table 2-1 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, TP cord) Permitted cable length
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 0 to 100 m
Table 2-2 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet, TP cord) Permitted cable length
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4x2
0 to 90 m
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 22
AWG
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 22
AWG
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
Table 2-3 Fitting connectors
PIN IE FC outlet RJ-45 IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet
Use
1000BaseT 10BaseT, 100BaseTX
1 Yellow Green/white D1+ Tx+
2 Orange Green D1- Rx+
3 White Orange/white D2+ Tx-
6 Blue Orange D2- Rx-
Description
2.4 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 19
PIN IE FC outlet RJ-45 IE FC RJ-45 modular
outlet
Use
1000BaseT 10BaseT, 100BaseTX
4 - Blue D3- -
5 - Blue/white D3+ -
7 - Brown/white D4- -
8 - Brown D4+ -
Description
2.4 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
20 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Assignment of an IP address 3
3.1 Structure of an IP address
Address classes
IP address range Max. number of networks Max. number of hosts/
network
Class CIDR
1.x.x.x through 126.x.x.x 126 16777214 A /8
128.0.x.x through 191.255.x.x 16383 65534 B /16
192.0.0.x through 223.255.255.x 2097151 254 C /24
224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255 Multicast applications D
240.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 Reserved for future applications E
An IP address consists of 4 bytes. Each byte is represented in decimal, with a dot separating
it from the previous one. This results in the following structure, where XXX stands for a number
between 0 and 255:
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The IP address is made up of two parts, the network ID and the host ID. This allows different
subnets to be created. Depending on the bytes of the IP address used as the network ID and
those used for the host ID, the IP address can be assigned to a specific address class.
Subnet mask
The bits of the host ID can be used to create subnets. The leading bits represent the address
of the subnet and the remaining bits the address of the host in the subnet.
A subnet is defined by the subnet mask. The structure of the subnet mask corresponds to that
of an IP address. If a "1" is used at a bit position in the subnet mask, the bit belongs to the
corresponding position in the IP address of the subnet address, otherwise to the address of
the computer.
Example of a class B network:
The standard subnet address for class B networks is 255.255.0.0; in other words, the last two
bytes are available for defining a subnet. If 16 subnets must be defined, the third byte of the
subnet address must be set to 11110000 (binary notation). In this case, this results in the
subnet mask 255.255.240.0.
To find out whether two IP addresses belong to the same subnet, the two IP addresses and
the subnet mask are ANDed bit by bit. If both logic operations have the save result, both IP
addresses belong to the same subnet, for example, 141.120.246.210 and 141.120.252.108.
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 21
Outside the local area network, the distinction between network ID and host ID is of no
significance, in this case packets are delivered based on the entire IP address.
Note
In the bit representation of the subnet mask, the "ones" must be set left-justified; in other
words, there must be no "zeros" between the "ones".
Assignment of an IP address
3.1 Structure of an IP address
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
22 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
3.2 Initial assignment of an IP address
Configuration options
An initial IP address for an IE switch cannot be assigned using Web Based Management
(WBM) because this configuration tool can only be used if an IP address already exists.
The following options are available to assign an IP address to an unconfigured device:
●DHCP (default)
●Primary Setup Tool (PST)
– To be able to assign an IP address to the IE switch with the PST, it must be possible to
reach the IE switch via Ethernet.
– You will find the PST at Siemens Industry Automation and Drives Service & Support on
the Internet under the entry ID 19440762 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/
view/en/19440762).
– For further information about assigning the IP address with the PST, refer to the
documentation "Primary Setup Tool (PST)".
●STEP 7 Classic
– In STEP 7, you can configure the topology, the device name and the IP address. If you
connect an unconfigured IE switch to the controller, the controller assigns the configured
device name and the IP address to the IE switch automatically.
– For further information on the assignment of the IP address using STEP 7 (…) refer to
the documentation "Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections STEP 7",
in the section "Steps For Configuring a PROFINET IO System".
●STEP 7 as of V12 SP1
For further information on assigning the IP address using STEP 7 (as of V12 SP1), refer
to the online help "Information system", section "Addressing PROFINET devices".
●CLI via the serial interface
For further information on assigning the IP address using the CLI, refer to the
documentation "SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Command Line Interface".
●NCM PC
For further information on assigning the IP address using NCM PC, refer to the
documentation "Commissioning PC stations - Manual and Quick Start", in the section
"Creating a PROFINET IO system".
Note
When the product ships and following "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", DHCP is
enabled. If a DHCP server is available in the local area network, and this responds to the
DHCP request of an IE switch, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway are assigned
automatically when the device first starts up.
Assignment of an IP address
3.2 Initial assignment of an IP address
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 23
3.3 Address assignment with DHCP
Properties of DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a method for automatic assignment of IP
addresses. It has the following characteristics:
● DHCP can be used both when starting up a device and during ongoing operation.
● The assigned IP address remains valid only for a limited time known as the lease time.
Once this period has elapsed, the client must either request a new IP address or extend
the lease time of the existing IP address.
● There is normally no fixed address assignment; in other words, when a client requests an
IP address again, it normally receives a different address from the previous address. It is
possible to configure the DHCP server so that the DHCP client always receives the same
fixed address in response to its request. The parameter with which the DHCP client is
identified for the fixed address assignment is set on the DHCP client. The address can be
assigned via the MAC address, the DHCP client ID or the system name. You configure the
parameter in "System > DHCP Client".
● the DHCP options 66, 67 are supported
– DHCP option 66: Assignment of a dynamic TFTP server name
– DHCP option 67: Assignment of a dynamic boot file name
Note
DHCP uses a mechanism with which the IP address is assigned for only a short time
(lease time). If the device does not reach the DHCP server with a new request on expiry
of the lease time, the assigned IP address, the subnet mask and the gateway continue
to be used.
The device therefore remains accessible under the last assigned IP address even
without a DHCP server. This is not the standard behavior of office devices but is
necessary for problem-free operation of the plant.
Assignment of an IP address
3.3 Address assignment with DHCP
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
24 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Technical basics 4
4.1 Configuration limits
Configuration limits of the device
The following table lists the configuration limits for Web Based Management and the Command
Line Interpreter of the device.
The usability of various functions depends on the device type you are using and whether or
not a KEY-PLUG is inserted.
Configurable function Maximum number
System Syslog server 3
E-mail server 3
SNMPv1 trap recipient 10
Layer 2 Virtual LANs (port-based; including VLAN 1) 257
Protocol-based VLAN groups per port 12
IPv4 subnet-based VLANs 150
Multiple Spanning Tree instances 16
Link aggregations or Etherchannels each with a maximum of 8
ports per aggregation
8
Ports in a link aggregation 8
Static MAC addresses in the forward database (FDB) 256
Multicast addresses without active GMRP 512
Multicast addresses with active GMRP 50
VLANs whose data traffic can be mirrored to a monitor port 255
Security IP addresses from a RADIUS server 3
Management ACLs (access rules for management) 10
Rules for port ACL MAC 128
Ingress and egress rules for port ACL MAC 256
Rules for port ACL IP 128
Ingress and egress rules for port ACL IP 256
Layer 3 Layer 3 interfaces 127
Entries in the hardware routing table 4096
Static routes 100
Possible routes to the same destination 8
DHCP Relay Agent interfaces 127
DHCP Relay Agent servers 4
VRRP router interfaces (VLAN interfaces only) 52
OSPF areas per device 5
OSPF area range entries per OSPF area (intra-area summary) 3
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 25
Configurable function Maximum number
OSPF interfaces 40
OSPF interfaces per OSPF area 40
OSPF virtual links (within an autonomous system) 8
OSPF interface authentication key 200
(40 interfaces each with 5
keys)
OSPF virtual link authentication key 40
(8 virtual links each with 5
keys)
Technical basics
4.1 Configuration limits
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
26 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
4.2 VLAN
Network definition regardless of the spatial location of the nodes
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) divides a physical network into several logical networks
that are shielded from each other. Here, devices are grouped together to form logical groups.
Only nodes of the same VLAN can address each other. Since multicast and broadcast frames
are only forwarded within the particular VLAN, they are also known as broadcast domains.
The particular advantage of VLANs is the reduced network load for the nodes and network
segments of other VLANs.
To identify which packet belongs to which VLAN, the frame is expanded by 4 bytes (VLAN
tagging (Page 28)). This expansion includes not only the VLAN ID but also priority information.
Options for the VLAN assignment
There are various options for the assignment to VLANs:
● Port-based VLAN
Each port of a device is assigned a VLAN ID. You configure port-based VLAN in "Layer 2
> VLAN > Port-based VLAN (Page 177)".
● Protocol-based VLAN
Each port of a device is assigned a protocol group. You can configure protocol-based VLAN
in "Layer 2 > VLAN > Protocol Based VLAN Port (Page 180)"
● Subnet-based VLAN
The IP address of the device is assigned a VLAN ID. You configure subnet-based VLAN
in "Layer 2 > VLAN > lPv4 Subnet Based VLAN (Page 181)".
processing the VLAN assignment
If more than one VLAN assignment is created on the device, the assignments are processed
in the following order:
1. Subnet-based VLAN
2. Protocol-based VLAN
3. Port-based VLAN
The frame is first examined for the IP address. If a rule on the "lPv4 Subnet Based VLAN" tab
applies, the frame is sent to the corresponding VLAN. If no rule applies, the protocol type of
the frame is examined. If a rule on the "Protocol Based VLAN Port" tab applies, the frame is
sent to the corresponding VLAN. If no rule applies, the frame is sent via the port-based VLAN.
The rules for the port-based VLAN are specified on the "Port Based VLAN" tab.
Technical basics
4.2 VLAN
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 27
4.3 VLAN tagging
Expansion of the Ethernet frames by four bytes
For CoS (Class of Service, frame priority) and VLAN (virtual network), the IEEE 802.1 Q
standard defined the expansion of Ethernet frames by adding the VLAN tag.
Note
The VLAN tag increases the permitted total length of the frame from 1518 to 1522 bytes. With
the IE switches, the standard MTU size is 1536 bytes. The MTU size can be changed to
values from 64 to 9216 bytes.
The end nodes on the networks must be checked to find out whether they can process this
length / this frame type. If this is not the case, only frames of the standard length may be sent
to these nodes.
The additional 4 bytes are located in the header of the Ethernet frame between the source
address and the Ethernet type / length field:
Figure 4-1 Structure of the expanded Ethernet frame
The additional bytes contain the tag protocol identifier (TPID) and the tag control information
(TCI).
Tag protocol identifier (TPID)
The first 2 bytes form the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) and always have the value 0x8100.
This value specifies that the data packet contains VLAN information or priority information.
Tag Control Information (TCI)
The 2 bytes of the Tag Control Information (TCI) contain the following information:
CoS prioritization
Technical basics
4.3 VLAN tagging
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
28 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
The tagged frame has 3 bits for the priority that is also known as Class of Service (CoS). The
priority according to IEEE 802.1p is as follows:
CoS bits Type of data
000 Non time-critical data traffic (less then best effort [basic setting])
001 Normal data traffic (best effort [background])
010 Reserved (standard)
011 Reserved ( excellent effort )
100 Data transfer with max. 100 ms delay
101 Guaranteed service, interactive multimedia
110 Guaranteed service, interactive voice transmission
111 Reserved
The prioritization of the data packets is possible only if there is a queue in the components in
which they can buffer data packets with lower priority.
The device has eight parallel queues in which the frames with different priorities can be
processed. First, the frames with the highest priority ("Strict Priority" method) are processed.
This method ensures that the frames with the highest priority are sent even if there is heavy
data traffic.
Canonical Format Identifier (CFI)
The CFI is required for compatibility between Ethernet and the token Ring.
The values have the following meaning:
Value Meaning
0 The format of the MAC address is canonical. In the canonical representation of the MAC
address, the least significant bit is transferred first. Standard-setting for Ethernet switches.
1 The format of the MAC address is not canonical.
VLAN ID
In the 12-bit data field, up to 4096 VLAN IDs can be formed. The following conventions apply:
VLAN ID Meaning
0 The frame contains only priority information (priority tagged frames) and no valid
VLAN identifier.
1 - 4094 Valid VLAN identifier, the frame is assigned to a VLAN and can also include priority
information.
4095 Reserved
Technical basics
4.3 VLAN tagging
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 29
4.4 SNMP
Introduction
With the aid of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), you monitor and control
network elements from a central station, for example routers or switches. SNMP controls the
communication between the monitored devices and the monitoring station.
Tasks of SNMP:
● Monitoring of network components
● Remote control and remote parameter assignment of network components
● Error detection and error notification
In versions v1 and v2c, SNMP has no security mechanisms. Each user in the network can
access data and also change parameter assignments using suitable software.
For the simple control of access rights without security aspects, community strings are used.
The community string is transferred along with the query. If the community string is correct,
the SNMP agent responds and sends the requested data. If the community string is not correct,
the SNMP agent discards the query. Define different community strings for read and write
permissions. The community strings are transferred in plain text.
Standard values of the community strings:
● public
has only read permissions
● private
has read and write permissions
Note
Because the SNMP community strings are used for access protection, do not use the
standard values "public" or "private". Change these values following the initial
commissioning.
Further simple protection mechanisms at the device level:
● Allowed Host
The IP addresses of the monitoring systems are known to the monitored system.
● Read Only
If you assign "Read Only" to a monitored device, monitoring stations can only read out data
but cannot modify it.
SNMP data packets are not encrypted and can easily be read by others.
The central station is also known as the management station. An SNMP agent is installed on
the devices to be monitored with which the management station exchanges data.
The management station sends data packets of the following type:
Technical basics
4.4 SNMP
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
30 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
● GET
Request for a data record from the agent
● GETNEXT
Calls up the next data record.
● GETBULK (available as of SNMPv2)
Requests multiple data records at one time, for example several rows of a table.
● SET
Contains parameter assignment data for the relevant device.
The SNMP agent sends data packets of the following type:
● RESPONSE
The agent returns the data requested by the manager.
● TRAP
If a certain event occurs, the SNMP agent itself sends traps.
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 use UDP (User Datagram Protocol). The data is
described in a Management Information Base (MIB).
SNMPv3
Compared with the previous versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. SNMPv3 introduces an
extensive security concept.
SNMPv3 supports:
● Fully encrypted user authentication
● Encryption of the entire data traffic
● Access control of the MIB objects at the user/group level
Technical basics
4.4 SNMP
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 31
4.5 Routing function
Introduction
The term routing describes the specification of routes for communication between different
networks; in other words, how does a data packet from subnet A get to subnet B.
SCALANCE X supports the following routing functions:
● Static routing
With static routing, the routes are entered manually in the routing table.
● Router redundancy
With standardized VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol), the availability of important
gateways is increased by redundant routers.
● Dynamic routing
The entries in the routing table are dynamic and are updated continuously. The entries are
created with one of the following dynamic routing protocols:
– OSPFv2
– RIPv2
Static routing
The route is entered manually in the routing table. Enter the route in the routing table on the
"Layer 3 > Routes (Page 243)" page.
See also
VRRP (Page 254)
4.5.1 VRRP
Router redundancy with VRRP
With the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), the failure of a router in a network can
be countered.
VRRP can only be used with virtual IP interfaces (VLAN interfaces) and not with router ports.
Several VRRP routers in a network segment are put together as a logical group representing
a virtual router (VR). The group is defined using the virtual ID (VRID). Within the group, the
VRID must be the same. The VRID can no longer be used for other groups.
The virtual router is assigned a virtual IP address and a virtual MAC address. One of the VRRP
routers within the group is specified as the master router. The master router has priority 255.
The other VRRP routers are backup routers. The master router assigns the virtual IP address
and the virtual MAC address to its network interface. The master router sends VRRP packets
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
32 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
(advertisements) to the backup routers at specific intervals. With the VRRP packets, the master
router signals that it is still functioning. The master router also replies to the ARP queries.
If the virtual master router fails, a backup router takes over the role of the master router. The
backup router with the highest priority becomes the master router. If the priority of the backup
routers is the same, the higher MAC address decides. The backup router becomes the new
virtual master router.
The new virtual master router adopts the virtual MAC and IP address. This means that no
routing tables or ARP tables need to be updated. The consequences of a device failure are
therefore minimized.
You configure VRRP in "Layer 3 > VRRP".
4.5.2 OSPFv2
Dynamic routing with OSPFv2
OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) is a cost-based routing protocol. To calculate the shortest
and most cost-effective route, the Short Path First algorithm by Dijkstra is used. OSPF was
developed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force).
You configure OSPFv2 in "Layer 3 > OSPFv2 (Page 260)".
OSPFv2 divides an autonomous system (AS) into different areas.
Areas in OSPF
The following areas exist:
● Backbone
The backbone area is area 0.0.0.0. All other areas are connected to this area. The backbone
area is connected either directly or via virtual connections with other areas.
All routing information is available in the backbone area. As a result, the backbone area is
responsible for forwarding information between different areas.
● Stub Area
This area contains the routes within its area within the autonomous system and the standard
route out of the autonomous system. The destinations outside this autonomous system are
assigned to the standard route.
● Totally Stubby Area
This area knows only the routes within its area and the standard route out of the area.
● Not So Stubby Area (NSSA)
This area can forward (redistribute) packets from other autonomous systems into the areas
of its own autonomous system. The packets are further distributed by the NSSA router.
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 33
Routers of OSPF
OSPF distinguishes the following router types:
● Internal router (IR)
All OSPF interfaces of the router are assigned to the same area.
● Area Border Router (ABR)
The OSPF interfaces of the router are assigned to different areas. One OSPF interface is
assigned to the backbone area. Where possible, routes are grouped together.
● Backbone Router (BR)
At least one of the OSPF interfaces is assigned to the backbone area.
● Autonomous System Area Border Router (ASBR)
One interface of the router is connected to a different AS, for example an AS that uses the
routing protocol RIP.
Virtual connection
Each area must be connected to the backbone area. In some situations a direct physical
connection is not possible. In this case, a router of the relevant area must be connected to a
backbone router via a virtual connection.
LSA types
Within the autonomous system, packets are exchanged that contain information about the
connections of a router and the connection status message. The packets are also known as
LSAs (Link State Advertisements). The LSAs are always sent from the router to the neighbor
router.
If there are changes in the network, LSAs are sent to all routers in the network. The information
depends on the LSA type.
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
34 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Router LSA (LSA Type 1)
The LSA Type 1 is only sent within an area. For each active connection of the router
that belongs to the area in consideration, an LSA Type 1 is generated. The LSA Type
1 contains information about the status and the costs of the connection, for example IP
address, network mask, network type
Network LSA (LSA Type 2)
The LSA Type 2 is sent only within an area. For each network that belongs to the relevant
area, the router generates an LSA Type 2. If several routers are interconnected in a
network, the LSA Type 2 is sent by the designated router (DR). The LSA Type 2 includes
the network address, the network mask and a list of routers that are connected to the
network
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 35
Summary LSA (LSA Type 3 / LSA Type 4)
The Summary LSA is generated by the area border router and sent into the area. The
Summary LSA contains information about routes outside the area but inside the AS.
Where possible, the routes are grouped together.
● Summary LSA (LSA Type 3)
The LSA Type 3 describes the routes to the networks and advertises the standard
route to the areas.
● AS Summary LSA (LSA Type 4)
The LSA Type 4 describes the routes to the ASBR.
External LSA (LSA Type 5 / LSA Type 7)
The External LSA is generated by the ASBR. The LSA type depends on the area.
● AS External LSA (LSA Type 5)
The LSA Type 5 is sent by the AS border router into the areas of the autonomous
system except the Stub and NSSA areas. The LSA contains information about routes
to a network in another AS. The routes are either created manually or learned
externally. The ASBR uses LSA Type 5 to distribute standard routes to the backbone
area.
● NSSA External LSA (LSA Type 7)
The LSA Type 7 is generated by the AS border router of an NSSA. The router is also
known as the NSSA ASBR. The LSA Type 7 is sent only within the NSSA. If the P
bit in LSA Type 7 = 1, these LSAs are converted to LSA Type 5 by the ABR and sent
to the backbone area.
Establishing the neighborhood
The router runs through the following statuses to establish a connection to the neighbor router.
1. Attempt state / Init state
The router activates OSPF and begins to send and receive Hello packets. Based on the
received Hello packets, the router learns which OSPF routers are in its vicinity. The router
checks the content of the Hello packet. The Hello packet also contains the list of the
neighbor routers (neighbor table) of the "sender".
2. Two way state
If, for example, the ID of the area, the area type and the settings for the times match, a
connection (adjacency) can be established to the neighbor. In a point-to-point network, the
connection is established directly. If several neighbor routers can be reached in a network,
the designated router (DR) and the designated backup router (DBR) are identified based
on Hello packets. The router with the highest router priority becomes the designated router.
If two routers have the same router priority, the router with the lower router ID becomes the
designated router. The router establishes a connection to the designated router.
3. Exchangestart state
The neighbor routers decide which router starts communication. The router with the higher
router ID becomes master.
4. Exchange state
The neighbor routers send packets that describe the content of their neighborhood
database. The neighborhood database (link state database - LSDB) contains information
on the topology of the network.
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
36 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5. Loading state
The router completes the received information. If the router still has questions relating to
the status of a specific connection, it sends a link state request. The neighbor router sends
a response (link state update). The response contains a suitable LSA. The router confirms
receipt of the response (link state acknowledge).
6. Full State
The information exchange with the neighbor router is completed. The neighborhood
database of the neighbor router is the same. Based on the Short Path First algorithm, the
router calculates a route to every destination. The route is entered in the routing table.
Check the neighborhood
The Hello packets are only used to establish the neighborhood relations. Hello packets are
used to check the connection to the neighbor router by sending them cyclically. If no Hello
packet is received within a certain interval (dead interval), the connection to the neighbor is
marked as "down". The relevant entries are deleted.
Updating the neighborhood database
Once the neighborhood database is established, LSAs are sent to all routers in the network if
there are changes in the topology.
4.5.3 RIPv2
Dynamic routing with RIPv2
The Routing Information Protocol (RIPv2) is used to create routing tables automatically. RIPv2
is used in autonomous systems (AS) with a maximum of 15 routers. It is based on the Distance-
Vector algorithm.
RIPv2 was developed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) and is described in RFC
2453.
You configure RIPv2 in "Layer 3 > RIPv2".
Setting up a routing table
Since a router initially only knows its directly connected networks, it sends a request to its direct
neighbor routers. As the reply, it receives the routing tables of the neighbor routers. Based on
the information it receives, the router set up its own routing table.
The routing table contains entries for all possible destinations. Each entry includes the distance
to the destination and the first router on the route.
The distance is also known as the metric. This indicates the number of routers to be passed
through on the route to the destination (hop count). The maximum distance is 15 routers (hops).
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 37
Updating the routing table
Once the routing table is set up, the router sends its routing table to each direct neighbor router
at intervals of 30 seconds.
The router compares new routing information with its existing routing table. If the new
information includes shorter routes, the existing routes are overwritten. The router only keeps
the shortest route to a destination.
Checking neighbor routers
If a router does not receive messages from a neighbor router for longer than 180 seconds, it
marks the router as being invalid. The router assigns the metric 16 for the neighbor router.
Technical basics
4.5 Routing function
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
38 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
4.6.1 Spanning Tree
Avoiding loops on redundant connections
The spanning tree algorithm allows network structures to be created in which there are several
connections between two stations. Spanning tree prevents loops being formed in the network
by allowing only one path and disabling the other (redundant) ports for data traffic. If there is
an interruption, the data can be sent over an alternative path. The functionality of the spanning
tree algorithm is based on the exchange of configuration and topology change frames.
Definition of the network topology using the configuration frames
The devices exchange configuration frames known as BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) with
each other to calculate the topology. The root bridge is selected and the network topology
created using these frames. BPDUs also bring about the status change of the root ports.
The root bridge is the bridge that controls the spanning tree algorithm for all involved
components.
Once the root bridge has been specified, each device sets a root port. The root port is the port
with the lowest path costs to the root bridge.
Response to changes in the network topology
If nodes are added to a network or drop out of the network, this can affect the optimum path
selection for data packets. To be able to respond to such changes, the root bridge sends
configuration messages at regular intervals. The interval between two configuration messages
can be set with the "Hello Time" parameter.
Keeping configuration information up to date
With the "Max Age" parameter, you set the maximum age of configuration information. If a
bridge has information that is older than the time set in Max Age, it discards the message and
initiates recalculation of the paths.
New configuration data is not used immediately by a bridge but only after the period specified
in the "Forward Delay" parameter. This ensures that operation is only started with the new
topology after all the bridges have the required information.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 39
4.6.1.1 RSTP, MSTP, CIST
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
One disadvantage of STP is that if there is a disruption or a device fails, the network needs to
reconfigure itself: The devices start to negotiate new paths only when the interruption occurs.
This can take up to 30 seconds. Fur this reason, STP was expanded to create the "Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol" (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w). This differs from STP essentially in that the
devices are already collecting information about alternative routes during normal operation
and do not need to gather this information after a disruption has occurred. This means that the
reconfiguration time for an RSTP controlled network can be reduced to a few seconds.
This is achieved by using the following functions:
● Edge ports (end node port)
Edge ports are ports connected to an end device.
A port that is defined as an edge port is activated immediately after connection
establishment. If a spanning tree BPDU is received at an edge port, the port loses its role
as edge port and it takes part in (R)STP again. If no further BPDU is received after a certain
time has elapsed (3 x hello time), the port returns to the edge port status.
● Point-to-point (direct communication between two neighboring devices)
By directly linking the devices, a status change (reconfiguration of the ports) can be made
without any delays.
● Alternate port (substitute for the root port)
A substitute for the root port is configured. If the connection to the root bridge is lost, the
device can establish a connection over the alternate port without any delay due to
reconfiguration.
● Reaction to events
Rapid spanning tree reacts to events, for example an aborted connection, without delay.
There is no waiting for timers as in spanning tree.
● Counter for the maximum bridge hops
The number of bridge hops a package is allowed to make before it automatically becomes
invalid.
In principle, therefore with rapid spanning tree, alternatives for many parameters are
preconfigured and certain properties of the network structure taken into account to reduce
the reconfiguration time.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is a further development of the Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol. Among other things, it provides the option of operating several RSTP instances
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
40 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
within different VLANs or VLAN groups and, for example, making paths available within the
individual VLANs that the single Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol would globally block.
Note
Default setting
HTTP is enabled as default on the device.
Common and internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
CIST identifies the internal instance used by the switch that is comparable in principle with an
internal RSTP instance.
4.6.2 HRP
HRP - High Speed Redundancy Protocol
HRP is the name of a redundancy method for networks with a ring topology. The switches are
interconnected via ring ports. One of the switches is configured as the redundancy manager
(RM). The other switches are redundancy clients. Using test frames, the redundancy manager
checks the ring to make sure it is not interrupted. The redundancy manager sends test frames
via the ring ports and checks that they are received at the other ring port. The redundancy
clients forward the test frames.
If the test frames of the RM no longer arrive at the other ring port due to an interruption, the
RM switches through its two ring ports and informs the redundancy clients of the change
immediately. The reconfiguration time after an interruption of the ring is a maximum of 0.3
seconds.
Standby redundancy
Standby redundancy is a method with which rings each of which is protected by high-speed
redundancy can be linked together redundantly. In the ring, a master/slave device pair is
configured and these monitor each other via their ring ports. If a fault occurs, the data traffic
is redirected from one Ethernet connection (standby port of the master or standby server) to
another Ethernet connection (standby port of the slave).
Requirements
● HRP is supported in ring topologies with up to 50 devices. Exceeding this number of devices
can lead to a loss of data traffic.
● For HRP, only devices that support this function can be used in the ring.
● All devices must be interconnected via their ring ports.
● Devices that do not support HRP must be linked to the ring using special devices with HRP
capability. Up to the ring, this connection is not redundant.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 41
4.6.3 MRP
4.6.3.1 MRP - Media Redundancy Protocol
The "MRP" method conforms to the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) specified in the
following standard:
IEC 62439‑2 Edition 1.0 (2010‑02) Industrial communication networks ‑ High availability
automation networks Part 2: Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
The reconfiguration time after an interruption of the ring is a maximum of 0.2 seconds.
Requirements
Requirements for problem-free operation with the MRP media redundancy protocol are as
follows:
● MRP is supported in ring topologies with up to 50 devices.
Except in PROFINET IO systems, topologies with up to 100 SCALANCE X-200 and
SCALANCE X-300 IE switches were tested successfully.
Exceeding this number of devices can lead to a loss of data traffic.
● The ring in which you want to use MRP may only consist of devices that support this function.
These include, for example, some of the Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X switches, some
of the communications processors (CPs) for SIMATIC S7 and PG/PC or non-Siemens
devices that support this function.
● All devices must be interconnected via their ring ports.
Multimode connections up to 3 km and single mode connections up to 26 km between two
SCALANCE X IE switches are possible. At greater distances, the specified reconfiguration
time may be longer.
● "MRP" must be activated on all devices in the ring (see section "Configuration in STEP 7
(Page 44)").
● The connection settings (transmission medium / duplex) must be set to full duplex and at
least 100 Mbps for all ring ports. Otherwise there may be a loss of data traffic.
– STEP 7: Set all the ports involved in the ring to "Automatic settings" in the "Options" tab
of the properties dialog.
– WBM: If you configure with Web Based Management, the ring ports are set automatically
to autonegotiation.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
42 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Topology
The following schematic shows a possible topology for devices in a ring with MRP.
Figure 4-2 Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol
The following rules apply to a ring topology with media redundancy using MRP:
● All the devices connected within the ring topology are members of the same redundancy
domain.
● One device in the ring is acting as redundancy manager.
● All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients.
Non MRP-compliant devices can be connected to the ring via a SCALANCE X switch or via a
PC with a CP 1616.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 43
4.6.3.2 Configuration in WBM
Role
The choice of role depends on the following use cases:
● You want to use MRP in a ring topology only with Siemens devices:
– For at least one device in the ring select "Automatic Redundancy Detection" or "MRP
Auto Manager".
– For all other devices in the ring select "MRP Client" or "Automatic Redundancy
Detection".
● You want to use MRP in a ring topology that also includes non-Siemens devices:
– For exactly one device in the ring select the role "MRP Auto Manager".
– For all other devices in the ring topology, select the role of "MRP Client".
Note
The use of "Automatic Redundancy Detection" is not possible when using non-Siemens
devices.
Configuration
In WBM, you configure MRP on the following pages:
● Configuration (Page 164)
● Ring redundancy (Page 190)
4.6.3.3 Configuration in STEP 7
Configuration in STEP 7
To create the configuration in STEP 7, select the parameter group "Media redundancy" on the
PROFINET interface.
Set the following parameters for the MRP configuration of the device:
● Domain
● Role
● Ring port
● Diagnostic interrupts
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
44 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
These settings are described below.
Note
Prioritized startup
If you configure MRP in a ring, you cannot use the "prioritized startup" function in PROFINET
applications on the devices involved.
If you want to use the "prioritized startup" function, then disable MRP in the configuration.
In the STEP 7 configuration, set the role of the relevant device to "Not a node in the ring".
Domain
Leave the default entry "mrpdomain 1" from the factory settings in the "Domain" drop-down
list.
All devices configured in a ring with MRP must belong to the same redundancy domain. A
device cannot belong to more than one redundancy domain.
If you leave the setting for "Domain" as the factory set "mrpdomain-1", the defaults for "Role"
and "Ring ports" also remain active.
The MRP settings remain in effect following a restart of the device or following a power down
and hot restart.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 45
Role
The choice of role depends on the following use cases.
● You want to use MRP in a ring topology only with Siemens devices and without monitoring
diagnostic interrupts:
Assign all devices to the "mrpdomain‑1" domain and the role "Manager (Auto)".
The device that actually takes over the role of redundancy manager, is negotiated by
Siemens devices automatically.
● You want to use MRP in a ring topology that also includes non-Siemens devices or you
want to receive diagnostic interrupts relating to the MRP status from a device (see
"Diagnostic interrupts"):
– Assign precisely one device in the ring the role of "redundancy manager".
– For all other devices in the ring topology, select the role of "Client".
Note
To ensure problem-free operation when using a non-Siemens device as the
redundancy manager in the ring, make sure that you assign the fixed role of "Client"
to all other devices in the ring, before you close the ring. Otherwise, there may be
circulating data frames that will cause a failure in the network.
● You want to disable MRP:
Select the option "Not node in the ring" if you do not want to operate the device within a
ring topology with MRP.
Note
Role after resetting to factory settings
Brand new Siemens devices and those reset to the factory settings have the MRP role
"Manager (Auto)" (CPs) or "Automatic Redundancy Detection" (SCALANCE X). If you are
operating a non-Siemens device as the redundancy manager in the ring, this may cause
loss of the data traffic.
Ring port 1 / ring port 2
Here, select the port you want to configure as ring port 1 and ring port 2.
With devices with more than 8 ports, not all ports can be selected as ring port.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
46 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
The drop-down list shows the selection of possible ports for each device type. If the ports are
specified in the factory, the boxes are grayed out.
NOTICE
Ring ports after resetting to factory settings
If you reset to the factory settings, the ring port settings are also reset.
● CPs adopt the "Manager (Auto)" MRP role.
● With switches, the redundancy method Automatic Redundancy Detection (ARD) is
activated.
If other ports were used previously as ring ports before resetting, with the appropriate
attachment, a previously correctly configured device can cause circulating frames and
therefore the failure of the data traffic.
Diagnostic interrupts
Enable the "Diagnostic interrupts" option, if you want diagnostic interrupts relating to the MRP
status on the local CPU to be output.
The following diagnostic interrupts can be generated:
● Wiring or port error
Diagnostic interrupts are generated if the following errors occur at the ring ports:
– Connection abort on a ring port
– A neighbor of the ring port does not support MRP.
– A ring port is connected to a non-ring port.
– A ring port is connected to the ring port of another MRP domain.
● Interruption / return (redundancy manager only)
If the ring is interrupted and when the original configuration returns, diagnostic interrupts
are generated.
The occurrence of both interrupts within 0.2 seconds indicates an interruption in the ring.
Parameter assignment of the redundancy is not set by STEP 7 (redundancy alternatives)
This option only affects switches. Select this option if you want to set the properties for media
redundancy using alternative mechanism or tools such as Web based Management (WBM),
CLI or SNMP.
If you enable this option, existing redundancy settings from WBM, CLI or SNMP, are retained
and are not overwritten. The parameters in the "MRP configuration" box are then reset and
grayed out. The entries then have no meaning.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 47
4.6.4 Standby
General
SCALANCE X switches support not only ring redundancy within a ring but also redundant
linking of rings or open network segments (linear bus). In the redundant link, rings are
connected together over Ethernet connections. This is achieved by configuring a master/slave
device pair in one ring so that the devices monitor each other and, in the event of a fault,
redirect the data traffic from the normally used master Ethernet connection to the substitute
(slave) Ethernet connection.
Standby redundancy
Figure 4-3 Example of redundant linking of two SCALANCE X‑200 IRT rings
For a redundant link as shown in the figure, two devices must be configured as standby
redundancy switches within a network segment. Here, network segments are rings with a
redundancy manager (RM, in the example, the SCALANCE X202-2IRT switches). Instead of
rings, network segments might also be linear.
The two X202 devices connected in the configuration exchange data frames with each other
to synchronize their operating statuses (one device is master and the other slave). If there are
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
48 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
no problems, only the link from the master to the other network segment is active. If this link
fails (for example due to a link-down or a device failure), the slave activates its link as long as
the problem persists.
Technical basics
4.6 Redundancy mechanism
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 49
4.7 Link aggregation
Link aggregation
With link aggregation, several parallel physical connections with the same transmission speed
are grouped together to form a logical connection with a higher transmission speed. This
method based on IEEE 802.3ad is also known as port trunking or channel bundling.
Link aggregation works only with full duplex connections with the same transmission speed in
point-to-point mode. This achieves multiplication of the bandwidth or transmission speed. If
part of the connection fails, the data traffic is handled via the remaining parts of the connection.
To control and monitor, the Link Aggregation Control Layer (LACL) and the Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) are used.
Technical basics
4.7 Link aggregation
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
50 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Configuring with Web Based Management 5
5.1 Web Based Management
How it works
The device has an integrated HTTP server for Web Based Management (WBM). If a device
is addressed using an Internet browser, it returns HTML pages to the client PC depending on
the user input.
The user enters the configuration data in the HTML pages sent by the device. The device
evaluates this information and generates reply pages dynamically.
The advantage of this method is that only an Internet browser is required on the client.
Note
Secure connection
WBM also allows you to establish a secure connection via HTTPS.
Use HTTPS for protected transfer of your data. If you wish to access WBM only via a secure
connection, activate the option "HTTPS Server only" under "System > Configuration".
Requirements
WBM display
● The device has an IP address
● There is a connection between the device and the client PC. With the Windows ping
command, you can check whether or not a connection exists.
● Access using HTTPS is enabled.
● JavaScript is activated in the Internet browser.
● The Internet browser must not be set so that it reloads the page from the server each time
the page is accessed. The updating of the dynamic content of the page is ensured by other
mechanisms. In the Internet Explorer, you can make the appropriate setting in the "Options
> Internet Options > General" menu in the section "Browsing history" with the "Settings"
button. Under "Check for newer versions of stored pages:", select "Automatically".
● If a firewall is used, the relevant ports must be opened.
– For access using HTTP: Port 80
– For access using HTTPS: Port 443
The display of the WBM was tested with the following desktop Internet browsers:
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 51
● Microsoft Internet Explorer 10
● Mozilla Firefox 24ESR
● Chrome V30
Note
Compatibility view
In Microsoft Internet Explorer, disable the compatibility view to ensure correct display and to
allow problem-free configuration using WBM.
Display of the WBM on mobile devices
For mobile devices, the following minimum requirements must be met:
Resolution Operating system Browser
960 x 640 pixels Android as of version 4.2.1
iOS as of version 6.0.2
Chrome as of version 18 on Android
Safari as of version 6 on iOS
Tested with the following Internet browsers for mobile devices:
● Safari on iOS 6.1 (iPhone, iPad Mini, iPod Touch 4th Generation)
● Chrome 27 on Android (Galaxy Nexus 4, Galaxy Nexus 7)
Note
Display of the WBM and working with it on mobile devices
The display on the WBM pages and how you work with them on mobile devices may differ
compared with the same pages on desktop devices. Some pages also have an optimized
display for mobile devices.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.1 Web Based Management
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
52 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.2 Login
Establishing a connection to a device
Follow the steps below to establish a connection to a device using an Internet browser:
1. There is a connection between the device and the client PC. With the ping command, you
can check whether or not a connection exists.
2. In the address box of the Web browser, enter the IP address or the URL of the device. If
there is a problem-free connection to the device, the login page of Web Based Management
(WBM)is displayed.
Logging on using the Web browser
Selecting the language of the WBM
1. From the drop-down list at the top right, select the language version of the WBM pages.
2. Click the "Go" button to change to the selected language.
Note
Available languages
in this version, only English is available. Other languages will follow in a later version.
Login with HTTP
There are two ways in which you can log in via HTTP. You either use the login option in the
center of the browser window or the login option in the upper left area of the browser window.
The following steps apply when logging in whichever of the above options you choose:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.2 Login
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 53
1. Enter the following in the "Name" input box:
– "admin": With this user type, you can change the settings of the device (read and write
access to the configuration data).
– "user": With this user type, you cannot change any of the settings of the device (read
access to the configuration data).
2. Enter your password in the "Password" input box.
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults und Restart",
enter the standard password in the "Password" input box.
– "admin": standard password "admin"
– "user": standard password "user"
3. Click the "Login" button or confirm your entry with "Enter".
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
will be prompted to change the password. The new password must be at least 6 characters
long. You need to repeat the password as confirmation. The password entries must match.
Click the "Set Values" to complete the action and activate the new password.
Once you have logged in successfully, the start page appears.
Login with HTTPS
Web Based Management also allows you to connect to the device over the secure connection
of the HTTPS protocol. Follow these steps:
1. Click on the link "Switch to secure HTTP" on the login page or enter "https://" and the IP
address of the device in the address box of the Internet browser.
2. Confirm the displayed certificate warning.
The login page of Web Based Management appears.
3. Enter the following in the "Name" input box:
– "admin": With this user type, you can change the settings of the device (read and write
access to the configuration data).
– "user": With this user type, you cannot change any of the settings of the device (read
access to the configuration data).
4. Enter your password in the "Password" input box.
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults und Restart",
enter the standard password in the "Password" input box.
– "admin": standard password "admin"
– "user": standard password "user"
5. Click the "Login" button or confirm your entry with "Enter".
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
will be prompted to change the password. The new password must be at least 6 characters
long. You need to repeat the password as confirmation. The password entries must match.
Click the "Set Values" to complete the action and activate the new password.
Once you have logged in successfully, the start page appears.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.2 Login
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
54 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.3 The "Information" menu
5.3.1 Start page
View of the Start page
When you enter the IP address of the device, the start page is displayed after a successful
login. You cannot configure anything on this page.
General layout of the WBM pages
The following areas are generally available on every WBM page:
● Selection area (1): Top area
● Display area (2): Top area
● Navigation area (3): Left-hand area
● Content area (4): Middle area
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 55
Selection area (1)
The following is available in the selection area:
● Logo of Siemens AG
● Display of: "System Location/System Name"
– "System Location" contains the location of the device.
With the settings when the device ships, the in-band port IP address of the device is
displayed.
– "System Name" is the device name.
With the settings when the device ships, the device type is displayed.
You can change the content of this display with "System > General > Device.
● Drop-down list for language selection
● System time and date
You can change the content of this display with "System > System Time.
Display area (2)
In the upper part of the display area, you can see the full title of the currently selected menu
item.
In the lower part of the display area, you will find the following:
●Printer
If you click this button, a popup window opens. The popup window contains a view of the
page content optimized for printers.
Note
Printing larger tables
If you want to print large tables, please use the "Print preview" function of your browser.
●Help
When you click this button, the help page of the currently selected menu item is opened in
a new browser window.
The help page contains a description of the content area. Under certain circumstances,
options are described that are not available on the device.
●LED simulation
Each component of a device has one or more LEDs that provide information on the
operating state of the device. Depending on its location, direct access to the device may
not always be possible. Web Based Management therefore displays simulated LEDs.
Unoccupied slots or unused connectors are displayed as a gray LED. The meaning of the
LED displays is described in the operating instructions.
If you click the simulated "Select/Set" button, you can change the display mode (LEDs DM
or D1/D2).
If you click this button, you open the window for the LED simulation. You can show this
window during a change of menu and move it as necessary. To close the LED simulation,
click the close button in the LED simulation window.
●Logging out
You can log out from any WBM page by clicking the "Logout" link.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
56 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Navigation area (3)
In the navigation area, you have various menus available. Click the individual menus to display
the submenus. The submenus contain pages on which information is available or with which
you can create configurations. These pages are always displayed in the content area.
Content area (4)
The content area shows a graphic of the device. The graphic is dynamic. The basic device is
always shown. If extenders/media modules are connected to the basic device, these are also
shown.
Figure 5-1 Example of a device graphic: SCALANCE XM416-4C with one port extender PE408
The following is displayed below the device graphic:
●PNIO Name of Station
Shows the PROFINET IO device name.
●System Name
Shows the system name of the device.
●Device Type
Shows the type of the device.
●PNIO AR Status
Shows the PROFINET IO application relation status.
– Online
There is a connection to a PROFINET IO controller. The PROFINET IO controller has
downloaded its configuration data to the device. The device can send status data to the
PROFINET IO controller.
In this status, the parameters set by the PROFINET IO controller cannot be configured
on the device.
– Offline
There is no connection to the PROFINET IO controller.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 57
●Power Line 1 / Power Line 2
– Up
Power supply 1 or 2 is applied
– Down:
Power supply 1 or 2 is not applied or is below the permitted voltage.
●PLUG configuration
Shows the status of the configuration data on the PLUG, refer to the section "System >
PLUG configuration (Page 149)".
●PLUG license
Shows the status of the license on the PLUG, refer to the section "System > PLUG
license (Page 152)".
●Faults Status
Shows the fault status of the device.
Buttons you require often
The pages of the WBM contain the following standard buttons:
●Refresh the display with "Refresh"
Web Based Management pages that display current parameters have a "Refresh" button
at the lower edge of the page. Click this button to request up-to-date information from the
device for the current page.
Note
If you click the "Refresh" button, before you have transferred your configuration changes
to the device using the "Set Values" button, your changes will be deleted and the previous
configuration will be loaded from the device and displayed here.
●Save entries with "Set Values"
Pages in which you can make configuration settings have a "Set Values" button at the lower
edge. The button only becomes active if you change at least one value on the page. Click
this button to save the configuration data you have entered on the device. Once you have
saved, the button becomes inactive again.
Note
Changing configuration data is possible only with the "admin" login.
●Create entries with "Create"
Pages in which you can make new entries have a "Create" button at the lower edge. Click
this button to create a new entry.
●Delete entries with "Delete"
Pages in which you can delete entries have a "Delete" button at the lower edge. Click this
button to delete the previously selected entries from the device memory. Deleting also
results in an update of the page in the WBM.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
58 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Page down with "Next"
The number of data records that can be displayed on a page is limited. Click the "Next"
button to page down through the data records.
●Page up with "Prev"
The number of data records that can be displayed on a page is limited. Click the "Prev"
button to page up through the data records.
5.3.2 Versions
Versions of hardware and software
This page shows the versions of the hardware and software of the device. You cannot configure
anything on this page.
Description of the displayed values
Table 1 has the following columns:
●Hardware
– Basic Device
Shows the basic device
– PX.X
X.X = port in which the SFP module is inserted.
– Slot X
"X" = slot number: Module plugged into this slot.
●Name
Shows the name of the device or module.
●Revision
Displays the hardware version of the device.
●Order ID
Shows the order number of the device or module.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 59
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Software
– Firmware
Shows the current firmware version. If a new firmware file was downloaded and the
device has not yet restarted, the firmware version of the downloaded firmware file is
displayed here. After the next restart, the downloaded firmware is activated and used.
– Bootloader
Shows the version of the boot software stored on the device.
●Description
Shows the short description of the software.
●Version
Shows the version number of the software version.
●Date
Shows the date on which the software version was created.
5.3.3 I&M
Identification and Maintenance data
This page contains information about device-specific vendor and maintenance data such as
the order number, serial number, version number etc. You cannot configure anything on this
page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
60 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following rows:
●Manufacturer ID
Shows the manufacturer ID.
●Order ID
Shows the order number.
●Serial Number
Shows the serial number.
●Hardware Revision
Shows the hardware version.
●Software Revision
Shows the software version.
●Revision Counter
Shows the revision counter: Counter for revisions since the initial commissioning
●Revision Date
Revision date: Date and time of the last revision
●Function Tag
Shows the function tag (plant designation) of the device. The plant designation (HID) is
created during configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.
●Location Tag
Shows the location tag (location identifier) of the device. The location identifier (LID) is
created during configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.
5.3.4 ARP table
Assignment of MAC address and IP address
With the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), there is a unique assignment of MAC address
to IP address. This assignment is kept by each network node in its own separate ARP table.
The WBM page shows the ARP table of the device.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 61
Description
The table has the following columns:
●Interface
Shows the interface via which the row entry was learnt.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the target device.
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the target device.
●Media Type
Shows the type of connection.
– Dynamic
The device recognized the address data automatically.
– Static
The addresses were entered as static addresses.
5.3.5 Log table
Logging events
The device allows you to log occurring events, some of which you can specify on the page of
the System > Events menu. This, for example, allows you to record when an authentication
attempt failed or when the connection status of a port has changed.
The content of the events log table is retained even when the device is turned off.
You cannot configure anything on this page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
62 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Severity Filters
You can filter the entries in the table according to severity. Select the required entries in the
check boxes above the table.
●Info
Information
●Warning
Warnings
●Critical
Critical
To display all entries, select either all of them or leave the check boxes empty.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 63
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●Restart
Counts the number of restarts since you last reset to factory settings and shows the device
restart after which the corresponding event occurred.
●System Up Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described event
occurred.
If the system time is set, the time is also displayed at which the event occurred.
●System Time
Shows the date and time of the device.
●Severity
Sorts the entry into the categories above.
●Log Message
Displays a brief description of the event that has occurred.
Description of the buttons and input boxes
"Clear" button
Click this button to delete the content of the event log file. The display is also cleared. The
restart counter is only reset after you have restored the device to the factory settings and
restarted the device.
Note
The number of entries in this table is restricted to 400. When this number is reached, the
oldest entries are discarded. The table remains permanently in memory.
"Show all" button
Click this button to display all the entries on the WBM page. Note that displaying all messages
can take some time.
"Next" button
Click this button to go to the next page.
"Prev" button
Click this button to go to the previous page.
Drop-down list for page change
From the drop-down list, select the page you want to go to.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
64 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.3.6 Faults
Error status
This page displays any errors that occur. Errors of the "Cold/Warm Start" event can be deleted
following confirmation.
If there are no more unanswered error/fault messages, the fault LED goes off.
The time calculation always begins after the last system start. When the system is restarted,
a new entry with the type of restart is created in the fault memory.
Description
The "No. of Signaled Faults" box shows the number of faults that have occurred since the last
startup. Click the "Reset Counters" button to reset this value.
The table contains the following columns:
●Fault Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described fault
occurred.
●Fault Description
Display of the fault status for the device.
●Clear Fault State
If the "Clear Fault State" button is enabled, you can delete the fault.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 65
5.3.7 Redundancy
5.3.7.1 Spanning Tree
Introduction
The page shows the current information about the Spanning Tree and the settings of the root
bridge.
Description of the displayed values
The following fields are displayed:
●Spanning Tree Mode
shows the set mode. You specify the mode in "Layer 2 > Configuration" and in "Layer 2 >
MSTP > General".
The following values are possible:
– '-'
– STP
– RSTP
– MSTP
●Instance ID
Shows the number of the instance. The parameter depends on the configured mode.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
66 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Bridge Priority / Root Priority
Which device becomes the root bridge is decided by the bridge priority. The bridge with the
highest priority (in other words, with the lowest value for this parameter) becomes the root
bridge. If several devices in a network have the same priority, the device whose MAC
address has the lowest numeric value will become the root bridge. Both parameters, bridge
priority and MAC address together form the bridge identifier. Since the root bridge manages
all path changes, it should be located as centrally as possible due to the delay of the frames.
The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of 4096 with a range of values from 0
to 32768.
●Bridge Address/ Root Address
The bridge address shows the MAC address of the device and the root address shows the
MAC address of the root switch.
●Root Cost
Shows the path costs from the device to the root bridge.
●Bridge Status
Shows the status of the bridge, e.g. whether or not the device is the root bridge.
●Regional Root Priority (available only with MSTP)
For a description, see Bridge Priority / Root Priority
●Regional Root Address (available only with MSTP)
Shows the MAC address of the device.
●Regional Root Cost (available only with MSTP)
Shows the path costs from the regional root bridge to the root bridge.
The table has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the port via which the device communicates. The port is made up of the module
number and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Role
Shows the status of the port. The following values are possible:
– Disabled
The port was removed manually from the Spanning Tree and will no longer be taken
into account by the Spanning Tree.
– Designated
The ports leading away from the root bridge.
– Alternate
The port with an alternative route to a network segment
– Backup
If a switch has several ports to the same network segment, the "poorer" Port becomes
the backup port.
– Root
The port that provides the best route to the root bridge.
– Master
This port points to a root bridge located outside the MST region.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 67
●State
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed. The parameter
depends on the configured protocol. The following statuses are possible:
– Discarding
The port receives BPDU frames. Other incoming or outgoing frames are discarded.
– Listening
The port receives and sends BPDU frames. The port is involved in the spanning tree
algorithm. Other outgoing and incoming frames are discarded.
– Learning
The port actively learns the topology; in other words, the node addresses. Other
outgoing and incoming frames are discarded.
– Forwarding
Following the reconfiguration time, the port is active in the network. The port receives
and sends data frames.
●Oper. Version
Describes the type of spanning tree in which the port operates
●Priority
If the path calculated by spanning tree is possible over several ports of a device, the port
with the highest priority (in other words the lowest value for this parameter) is selected. A
value between 0 and 240 can be entered for the priority in steps of 16. If you enter a value
that cannot be divided by 16, the value is automatically adapted. The default is 128.
●Path Cost
This parameter is used to calculate the path that will be selected. The path with the lowest
value is selected. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with the lowest
port number is selected.
If the value in the "Cost Calc" field is "0", the automatically calculated value is displayed.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc" field is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher
the achievable transmission speed is, the lower the value of the path costs.
Typical values for path costs with rapid spanning tree:
– 10,000 Mbps = 2,000
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
68 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Edge Type
Shows the type of the connection. The following values are possible:
– Edge Port
There is an end device at this port.
– No Edge Port
There is a Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree device at this port.
●P.t.P. Type
Shows the type of point-to-point link. The following values are possible:
– P.t.P.
With half duplex, a point-to-point link is assumed.
–
Shared Media
With a full duplex connection, a point-to-point link is not assumed.
5.3.7.2 VRRP Statistics
Introduction
This page shows the statistics of the VRRP protocol and all configured virtual routers.
Description of the displayed values
The following fields are displayed:
●VRID Errors
Shows how many VRRP packets containing an unsupported VRID were received.
●Version Errors
Shows how many VRRP packets containing an invalid version number were received.
●Checksum Errors
Shows how many VRRP packets containing an invalid checksum were received.
The table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 69
●Interfaces
Interface to which the settings relate.
●VRID
Shows the ID of the virtual router.
Valid values are 1 to 255.
●Become Master
Shows how often this virtual router changed to the "Master" status.
●Advertisements Received
Shows how often a VRRP packet was received that contained a bad address list.
●Advertisements Interval Errors
Shows how many bad VRRP packets were received whose interval does not match the
value set locally.
●IP TTL Errors
Shows how many bad VRRP packets were received whose TTL (Time to live) value in the
IP header is incorrect.
●Prio 0 received
Shows how many VRRP packets with priority 0 were received. VRRP packets with priority
0 are sent when a master router is shut down. These packets allow a fast handover to the
relevant backup router.
●Prio 0 sent
Shows how many VRRP packets with priority 0 were sent. Packets with priority 0 are sent
when a master router is shut down. These packets allow a fast handover to the relevant
backup router.
●Invalid Auth. Type
Shows how many bad VRRP packets were received whose authentication type was not
type 0. Type 0 means "no authentication".
●Auth. Type Mismatch
Shows how many bad VRRP packets were received whose authentication type does not
match.
●Packet Length Error
Shows how many bad VRRP packets were received whose length is not correct.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
70 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.3.7.3 Ring redundancy
Information on ring redundancy
On this tab, you obtain information about the status of the device in terms of ring redundancy.
The text boxes on this page are read-only.
The table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 71
●Redundancy Function
The "Redundancy Function" column shows the role of the device within the ring:
– No Ring Redundancy (off)
The IE switch is operating without redundancy function.
– HRP Client
The IE switch is operating as an HRP client.
– HRP Manager
The IE switch is operating as an HRP manager.
– MRP Client
The IE switch is operating as an MRP client.
– MRP Manager
The IE switch is operating as an MRP manager.
●RM Status
The "RM Status" column shows whether or not the IE switch is operating as redundancy
manager and whether it has opened or closed the ring in this role.
– Passive:
The IE switch is operating as redundancy manager and has opened the ring; in other
words, the line of switches connected to the ring ports is operating problem free. The
passive status is also displayed if the IE switch is not operating as the redundancy
manager (RM function disabled).
– Active:
The IE switch is operating as redundancy manager and has closed the ring; in other
words, the line of switches connected to the ring ports is interrupted (problem). The
redundancy manager connects its ring ports through and restores an uninterrupted
linear topology.
– If media redundancy in ring topologies is completely disabled, ring ports configured last
are displayed and the text "Ring Redundancy disabled" is displayed.
●Observer Status
Shows the current status of the observer.
●Ring Port 1 and Ring Port 2
The "Ring Port 1" and "Ring Port 2" columns show the ports being used as ring ports.
●No. of Changes to RM Active State
Shows how often the device as redundancy manager switched to the active status, i.e.
closed the ring.
If the redundancy function is disabled or the device is an HRP/MRP client , the text
"Redundancy Manager Disabled" appears.
●Max. Delay of RM Test Packets[ms]
Shows the maximum delay time of the test frames of the redundancy manager.
If the redundancy function is disabled or the device is an HRP/MRP client , the text
"Redundancy Manager Disabled" appears.
● Click the "Reset Counters" button to reset the counters on this page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
72 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.3.7.4 Standby redundancy
Information on standby redundancy
On this tab, you obtain information about the status of the device in terms of standby
redundancy. The text boxes on this page are read-only.
Note
Device with the higher MAC address becomes master
When linking HRP rings redundantly, two devices are always configured as a master/slave
pair. This also applies to interrupted HRP rings = linear buses. When operating normally, the
device with the higher MAC address adopts the role of master.
This type of assignment is important in particular when a device is replaced. Depending on
the MAC addresses, the previous device with the slave function can take over the role of the
standby master.
The Standby tab shows the status of the standby function:
The meaning of the displayed boxes is as follows:
●Standby Port
The "Standby Port" display box shows the standby port or the standby ports.
Note
You can configure one or more standby ports. In the following paragraphs, the plural
"standby" ports is used.
●Standby Name
Standby Connection Name
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 73
●Standby Function
– Master:
The device has a connection to the partner device and is operating as master. In normal
operation, the standby ports of this device are active.
– Slave:
The device has a connection to the partner device and is operating as slave. In normal
operation, the standby ports of this device are inactive.
– Disabled:
Standby link is disabled. The device is operating neither as master nor slave. The
standby ports are working as normal ports without standby function.
– Waiting for Connection....:
No connection has yet been established to the partner device. The standby ports are
inactive. In this case, either the configuration on the partner device is inconsistent (for
example incorrect connection name, standby link disabled) or there is a physical fault
(for example device failure, link down).
– Connection Lost:
Existing connection to the partner device has been lost. In this case there is either a
physical fault (for example, device failure, link down) or the configuration on the partner
device was modified (for example different connection name, standby link disabled).
●Standby Status
The "Standby Status" display box shows the status of the standby ports:
– Active:
The standby ports of this device are active; in other words are enabled for frame traffic.
– Passive:
The standby ports of this device are inactive; in other words are disabled for frame traffic.
●No. of Changes to Standby Active State
Shows how often the IE switch has changed the standby status from "passive" to "active".
If the connection of a standby port fails on the standby master, the IE switch changes to
the "active" status.
If the standby function is disabled, the text "Standby Disabled" appears in this box.
Click the "Reset Counters" button to reset the counters on this page.
Following each restart on the device, the counters are automatically reset.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
74 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.3.8 Ethernet statistics
5.3.8.1 Interface statistics
Interface statistics
The page shows the statistics from the interface table of the Management Information Base
(MIB).
Figure 5-2 Interface statistics
Displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●In Octet
Shows the number of received bytes.
●Out Octet
Shows the number of sent bytes.
●In Unicast
Shows the number of received unicast frames.
●In Non-Unicast
Shows the number of received frames that are not of the type unicast.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 75
●Out Unicast
Shows the number of sent unicast frames.
●Out Non-Unicast
Shows the number of sent frames that are not of the type unicast.
5.3.8.2 Packet size
Frames sorted by length
This page displays how many frames of which size were sent and received at each port. You
cannot configure anything on this page.
The displayed values are transferred by RMON.
On the page "Layer 2 > RMON > Statistics", you can set the ports for which values will be
displayed.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
76 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the available ports and link aggregations. The port is made up of the module number
and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
Note
Display of frame statistics
In the statistics relating to frame size, note that both incoming and outgoing frames are
counted.
●Frame lengths
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of incoming frames
according to their frame length.
The following frame lengths are distinguished:
– 64 bytes
– 65 - 127 bytes
– 128 - 255 bytes
– 256 - 511 bytes
– 512 - 1023 bytes
– 1024 - max.
Note
Data traffic on blocked ports
For technical reasons, data packets can be indicated on blocked ports.
Description of the button
"Reset Counter" button
Click "Reset Counter" to reset all counters. The counters are reset by a restart.
5.3.8.3 Packet type
Received frames sorted by type
This page displays how many frames of the type "Unicast", "Multicast" and "Broadcast" were
received at each port. You cannot configure anything on this page.
The displayed values are transferred by RMON.
On the page "Layer 2 > RMON > Statistics", you can set the ports for which values will be
displayed.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 77
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the available ports and link aggregations. The port is made up of the module number
and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Unicast / Multicast / Broadcast
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of the incoming
frames according to their frame type "Unicast", "Multicast" and "Broadcast".
Description of the button
"Reset Counters" button
Click "Reset Counters" to reset all counters. The counters are reset by a restart.
5.3.8.4 Packet Error
Bad received frames
This page shows how many bad frames were received per port. You cannot configure anything
on this page.
The displayed values are transferred by RMON.
On the page "Layer 2 > RMON > Statistics", you can set the ports for which values will be
displayed.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
78 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the available ports and link aggregations. The port is made up of the module number
and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Error types
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of the incoming
frames according to their error type.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following error types:
–
CRC
Packets whose content does not match the CRC checksum.
–
Undersize
Packets with a length less than 64 bytes.
– Oversize
Packets discarded because they were too long.
–
Fragments
Packets with a length less than 64 bytes and a bad CRC checksum.
– Jabbers
VLAN-tagged packets with an incorrect CRC checksum that were discarded because
they were too long.
– Collisions
Detected collisions.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 79
Description of the button
"Reset Counters" button
Click "Reset Counters" to reset all counters. The counters are reset by a restart.
5.3.8.5 History
Samples of the statistics
The page shows samples from each port with information from the RMON statistics.
On the page "Layer 2 > RMON > History", you can set the ports for which samples will be taken.
Figure 5-3 History
Settings
●Port
Select the port for which the history will be displayed.
Displayed values
●Buckets
Maximum number of samples that can be saved at the same time.
●Interval[s]
Interval after which the current status of the statistics will be saved as a sample.
The table has the following columns:
●Sample
Number of the sample
●Sample Time
System up time at which the sample was taken.
●Unicast
Number of received unicast frames.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
80 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Multicast
Number of received multicast frames.
●Broadcast
Number of received broadcast frames.
●CRC
Number of frames with a bad CRC checksum.
●Undersize
Number of frames that are shorter than 64 bytes.
●Oversize
Number of frames discarded because they were too long.
●Fragments
Number of frames that are shorter than 64 bytes and have a bad CRC checksum.
●Jabbers
Number of frames with a VLAN tag that have a bad CRC checksum and will be discarded
because they are too long.
●Collisions
Number of collisions of received frames.
●Utilization[0.01%]
Utilization of the port during a sample.
5.3.9 Unicast
Status of the unicast filter table
This page shows the current content of the unicast filter table. This table lists the source
addresses of unicast address frames. Entries can be made either dynamically when a node
sends a frame to a port or statically by the user setting parameters.
Figure 5-4 Unicast
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 81
Description
This table contains the following columns:
●VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID assigned to this MAC address.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the node that the device has learned or the user has configured.
●Status
Shows the status of each address entry:
– Learnt
The specified address was learned by receiving a frame from this node and will be
deleted when the aging time expires if no further packets are received from this node.
– Static
Configured by the user. Static addresses are stored permanently; in other words, they
are not deleted when the aging time expires or when the switch is restarted.
●Port
Shows the port via which the node with the specified address can be reached. Frames
received by the device whose destination address matches this address will be forwarded
to this port.
5.3.10 Multicast
Status of the multicast filter table
This table shows the multicast frames currently entered in the multicast filter table and their
destination ports. The entries can be dynamic (the device has learned them) or static (the user
has set them).
Figure 5-5 Multicast
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
82 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description
This table contains the following columns:
●VLAN ID
Shows VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the MAC multicast address is assigned.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC multicast address that the device has learned or the user has configured.
●Status
Shows the status of each address entry. The following information is possible:
– static
The address was entered statically by the user. Static addresses are stored
permanently; in other words, they are not deleted when the aging time expires or when
the device is restarted. These must be deleted by the user.
– IGMP
The destination port for this address was obtained by IGMP configuration.
– GMRP
The destination port for this address was registered by a received GMRP frame. List of
ports There is a column for each slot. Within a column, the multicast group to which the
port belongs is shown. The drop-down list provides the following options: M (Member)
Multicast frames are sent via this port. R (Registered) Member of the multicast group,
registration was by a GMRP frame. I (IGMP) Member of the multicast group, registration
was by an IGMP frame. - Not a member of the multicast group. No multicast frames with
the defined multicast MAC address are sent via this port. F (Forbidden) Not a member
of the multicast group. This address must also not be an address learned dynamically
with GMRP or IGMP.
●Port List
There is a column for each slot. Within a column, the multicast group to which the port
belongs is shown:
– M
(Member) Multicast frames are sent via this port.
– R
(Registered) Member of the multicast group, registration was by a GMRP frame.
– I
(IGMP) Member of the multicast group, registration was by an IGMP frame.
– –
Not a member of the multicast group. No multicast frames with the defined multicast
MAC address are sent via this port.
– F
(Forbidden) Not a member of the multicast group. This address must also not be an
address learned dynamically with GMRP or IGMP.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 83
5.3.11 LLDP
Status of the neighborhood table
This page shows the current content of the neighborhood table. This table stores the
information that the LLDP agent has received from connected devices.
You set the interfaces via which the LLDP agent receives or sends information in the following
section: "Layer 2 >LLDP (Page 215)".
Figure 5-6 Information LLDP
Description of the displayed values
This table contains the following columns:
●Device ID
Device ID of the connected device.
●Local Interface
Port at which the IE switch received the information.
●Hold Time
An entry remains stored in the MIB for the time specified here. If the IE switch does not
receive any new information from the connected device during this time, the entry is deleted.
●Capability
Shows the properties of the connected device:
– Router
– Bridge
– Telephone
– DOCSIS Cable Device
– WLAN Access Point
– Repeater
– Station
– Other
●Port ID
Port of the device with which the IE switch is connected.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
84 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.3.12 Routing
5.3.12.1 Routing Table
Introduction
This page shows the routing table of the device.
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●Destination Network
Shows the destination address of this route.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask of this route.
●Gateway
Shows the gateway for this route.
●Interface
Shows the interface for this route.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 85
●Metric
Shows the metric of the route. The higher value, the longer packets require to their
destination.
●Routing Protocol
Shows the routing protocol from which the entry in the routing table originates. The following
entries are possible:
– Connected: Connected routes
– Static: Static routes
– RIP: Routes via RIP
– OSPF: Routes via OSPF
– Other: Other routes
5.3.12.2 OSPFv2 Interfaces
Overview
This page shows the configuration of the OSPF interface.
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the OSPF interface
●Area ID
Shows the Area ID to which the OSPF interface belongs.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
86 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Interface Status
Shows the status of the interface:
– Down
The interface is not available.
– Loop back
Loop back interface
– Waiting
Starting up and negotiating the interface.
– Point to Point
Point-to-point link
– Designated Router
The router is a designated router and generates network LSAs.
– Backup D. Router
The router is the backup router for the designated router.
– Other D. Router
The Interface has started up. The router is neither a designated nor a designated backup
router.
●OSPF Status
Shows the status of OSPF.
– Enabled: OSPF is enabled on the interface.
– Disabled: OSPF is disabled on the interface.
●Designated Router
Shows the IP address of the designated router for this OSPF interface.
●Backup Designated Router
Shows the IP address of the designated backup router for this OSPF interface.
●Events
Shows the number of status changes of OSPF.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 87
5.3.12.3 OSPFv2 Neighbors
Overview
This page shows the dynamically detected neighbor routers in the relevant networks.
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the neighbor router in this network.
●Neighbor Router ID
Shows the ID of the neighbor router. The two addresses can match.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
88 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Status
Shows the status of the neighbor router. The status can adopt the following values:
– unknown
Status of the neighbor router is unknown.
– down
The neighbor router cannot be reached.
– attempt and init
Brief status during initialization
– two-way
Two-way receipt of Hello packets. Specification of the designated router and the
designated backup router.
– exchangestart, exchange and loading
Status during exchange of the LSAs
– full
The database is complete and synchronized within the area. The routes can now be
detected.
Note
Normal status
If the partner router is a designated router or a designated backup router, the status is
"full". Otherwise the status is "two-way".
●Assoc. Area Type
Shows the area type via which the neighbor-neighbor relation is maintained. The following
area types exist:
– Standard
– Stub
– NSSA
– Backbone
●Priority
Shows the priority of the neighbor router. This is only significant when selecting the
designated router on a network. For virtual neighbor routers, this information is irrelevant.
●Hello Suppr.
Shows the suppressed Hello packets to the neighbor router. This field normally displays
"no".
●Retrans Queue
Shows the length of the queue with Hello packets still to be transmitted.
●Events
Shows the number of status changes.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 89
5.3.12.4 OSPFv2 Virtual Neighbors
Overview
This page shows the configured virtual neighbors.
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the virtual neighbor router in this network.
●Router ID
Shows the router ID of the virtual neighbor router.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
90 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Status
Shows the status of the neighbor router. The status can adopt the following values:
– unknown
Status of the neighbor router is unknown.
– down
The neighbor router cannot be reached.
– attempt and init
Brief status during initialization
– two-way
Two-way receipt of Hello packets. Specification of the designated router and the
designated backup router.
– exchangestart, exchange and loading
Status during exchange of the LSAs
– full
The database is complete and synchronized within the area. The routes can now be
detected.
Note
Normal status
If the partner router is a designated router or a designated backup router, the status is
"full". Otherwise the status is "two-way".
●Trans. Area ID
Shows the ID of the area via which the virtual neighborhood relation exists.
●Hello Suppr.
Shows whether there are suppressed Hello packets to the virtual neighbor router.
– no: There are no suppressed Hello packets (default)
– yes: There are suppressed Hello packets.
●Retrans Queue
Shows the length of the queue with Hello packets still to be transmitted.
●Events
Shows the number of status changes.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 91
5.3.12.5 OSPFv2 LSDB
Overview
The link state database is the central database for managing all links within an area. It consists
of the link state advertisements (LSAs). The most important data of these LSAs is shown on
the this WBM page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
92 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Area ID
Shows the ID of the area to which the LSA belongs. If the LSA is an external connection,
'-' is displayed.
●Link State Type
Shows the LSA type. The following values are possible:
– Unknown
LSA type is unknown.
– Router
The router LSA (Type 1) is sent by the OSPF router within an area. The LSA contains
information about the status of all router interfaces.
– Network
The network LSA (Type 2) is sent by the designated router within an area. The LSA
contains a list of routers connected to the network.
– NSSA External
The NSSA external LSA (Type 7) is sent by the NSSA-ASBR within an NSSA. The
NSSA-ASBR receives LSAs of Type 5 and converts the information to LSAs of Type 7.
The NSSA router can forward these LSAs within an NSSA.
– Summary
The summary LSA (Type 3) is sent by the ABR within an area. The LSA contains
information about routes to other networks.
– AS Summary
The AS summary LSA (Type 4) is sent by the area border router within an area. The
LSA contains information about routes to other autonomous systems.
– AS External
The AS external LSA (Type 5) is sent by the AS border router within an autonomous
system. The LSA contains information about routes from one network to another.
●Link State ID
Shows the ID of the LSA.
●Router ID
Shows the ID of the router that sent this LSA.
●Sequence No.
Shows the sequence number of the LSA. Each time an LSA is renewed, this sequence
number is incremented by one.
5.3.12.6 RIPv2 Statistics
Overview
This page shows the statistics of the RIP interface.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 93
Description of the displayed values
Figure 5-7 RIPv2 Statistics information
The table has the following columns:
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the RIPv2 interface
●Bad packets
Number of received RIP packets that were deleted and therefore ignored.
●Bad routes
Number of routes of valid RIP packets that could not be taken into consideration.
●Updates Sent
Shows how often the router has sent its routing table to its neighbor routers.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 The "Information" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
94 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4 The "System" menu
5.4.1 Configuration
System configuration
The WBM page contains the configuration overview of the access options of the device.
Specify the services that access the device. With some services, there are further configuration
pages on which more detailed settings can be made.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Telnet Server
Enable or disable the "Telnet Server" service for unencrypted access to the CLI.
●SSH Server
Enable or disable the "SSH Server" service for encrypted access to the CLI.
●HTTPS Server only
When this function is enabled, you can only access the device using HTTPS.
●DNS Client
Enable or disable depending on whether the IE switch should operate as a DNS client. You
can configure other settings in "System > DNS".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 95
●SMTP Client
Enable or disable the SMTP client. You can configure other settings in "System > SMTP
Client".
●Syslog Client
Enable or disable the Syslog client. You can configure other settings in "System > Syslog
Client".
●DCP Server
Specify whether or not the device can be accessed with DCP (Discovery and Configuration
Protocol):
– "-" (disabled)
DCP is disabled. Device parameters can neither be read nor modified.
– Read/Write
With DCP, device parameters can be both read and modified.
– Read-Only
With DCP, device parameters can be read but cannot be modified.
●Time
Select the setting from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– Manual
The system time is set manually. You can configure other settings in "System > Time >
Manual Setting".
– SIMATIC Time
The system time is set using a SIMATIC time transmitter. You can configure other
settings in "System > System Time > SIMATIC Time Client".
– SNTP Client
The system time is set via an SNTP server. You can configure other settings in "System
> System Time > SNTP Client".
– NTP Client
The system time is set via an NTP server. You can configure other settings in "System
> System Time > NTP Client".
– PTP Client (SCALANCE XR-500 only)
The system time is set via a PTP server. You can configure other settings in "System >
System Time > PTP Client".
●SNMP
Select the protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (SNMP disabled)
Access to device parameters via SNMP is not possible.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
Access to device parameters is possible with SNMP versions 1, 2c or 3. You can
configure other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
– SNMPv3
Access to device parameters is possible only with SNMP version 3. You can configure
other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
●SNMPv1/v2 Read-Only
Enable or disable write access to SNMP variables with SNMPv1/v2c.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
96 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●SNMPv1 Traps
Enable or disable the sending of traps (alarm frames). You can configure other settings in
"System > SNMP > Traps".
●SINEMA Configuration Interface
If the SINEMA configuration interface is enabled, you can download configurations to the
IE switch via the TIA Portal.
●NFC (only for SCALANCE XM-400)
Activate or deactivate the "NFC" (Near Field Communication) function.
You will find further information on NFC in the "SCALANCE XM400" Operating Instructions.
●Configuration Mode
Select the mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
– Automatic Save
Automatic save mode. Approximately 1 minute after the last parameter change or when
you restart the device, the configuration is automatically saved.
– Trial
Trial mode. In Trial mode, although changes are adopted, they are not saved in the
configuration file (startup configuration).
To save changes in the configuration file, use the "Write Startup Config" button. The
"Write Startup Config" button is displayed when you set trial mode. The message "Trial
Mode Active – Press "Write Startup Config" button to make your settings persistent" is
also displayed in the display area as soon as there are unsaved changes. This message
can be seen on every WBM page until the changes made have either been saved or
the device has been restarted.
Steps in configuration
1. To use the required function, select the corresponding check box.
2. Select the options you require from the drop-down lists.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 97
5.4.2 General
5.4.2.1 Device
General device information
This page contains the general device information.
The boxes "Current System Time", "System Up Time" and "Device Type" cannot be changed.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●Current System Time
Shows the current system time. The system time is either set by the user or by a time-of-
day frame: either SINEC H1 time-of-day frame, NTP or SNTP. (readonly)
●System Up Time
Shows the running time of the device since the last restart. (readonly)
●Device Type
Shows the type of the device. (readonly)
●"System Name" input box
You can enter the name of the device. The entered name is displayed in the selection area.
A maximum of 255 characters are possible.
The system name is also displayed in the CLI input prompt. The number of characters in
the CLI input prompt is limited. The system name is truncated after 16 characters.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
98 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●"System Contact" input box
You can enter the name of a contact person responsible for managing the device. A
maximum of 255 characters are possible.
●"System Location" input box
You can enter the installation location of the device. The entered installation location is
displayed in the selection area. A maximum of 255 characters are possible.
Note
The ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used in the input boxes.
At the start and end of the boxes "System Name", "System Contact" and "System
Location", the characters "<", ">" and "space" are not permitted.
Procedure
1. Enter the contact person responsible for the device in the "System Contact" input box.
2. Enter the identifier for the location at which the device is installed in the "System Location"
input box.
3. Enter the name of the device in the "System Name" input box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.2.2 Coordinates
Information on geographic coordinates
In the "Geographic Coordinates" window, you can enter information on the geographic
coordinates. The parameters of the geographic coordinates (latitude, longitude and the height
above the ellipsoid according to WGS84) are entered directly in the input boxes of the
"Geographic Coordinates" window.
Getting the coordinates
Use suitable maps for obtaining the geographic coordinates of the device.
The geographic coordinates can also be obtained using a GPS receiver. The geographic
coordinates of these devices are normally displayed directly and only need to be entered in
the input boxes of this page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 99
Description
The page contains the following boxes. These are purely information boxes with a maximum
length of 32 characters.
●"Latitude" input box
Geographical latitude: Here, enter the value for the northerly or southerly latitude of the
location of the device.
For example, the value +49° 1´31.67" means that the device is located at 49 degrees, 1
arc minute and 31.67 arc seconds northerly latitude.
A southerly latitude is shown by a preceding minus character.
You can also append the letters N (northerly latitude) or S (southerly latitude) to the numeric
information (49° 1´31.67" N).
●"Longitude" input box
Geographical longitude: Here, you enter the value of the eastern or western longitude of
the location of the device.
The value +8° 20´58.73" means that the device is located at 8 degrees, 20 minutes and
58.73 seconds east.
A western longitude is indicated by a preceding minus sign.
You can also add the letter E (easterly longitude) or W (westerly longitude) to the numeric
information (8° 20´58.73" E).
●Input box: "Height"
Geographical height: Here, you enter the value of the geographic height above sea level
in meters.
For example, 158 m means that the device is located at a height of 158 m above sea level.
Heights below sea level (for example the Dead Sea) are indicated by a preceding minus
sign.
Procedure
1. Enter the latitude in the "Latitude" input box.
2. Enter the longitude in the "Longitude" input box.
3. Enter the height in the "Height" input box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.3 Agent IP
Here, you specify the IP configuration for the device.
With devices with more than one IP interface, this call references the "Subnets Configuration"
menu item in the "Layer 3" menu and the configuration of the TIA interface there.
5.4.4 DNS
The DNS () server (Domain Name System) assigns a domain name to an IP address so that
a device can be uniquely identified.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
100 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
If this function is enabled, the IE switch can communicate with a DNS server as a DNS client.
Note
The DNS client function can only be used if there is a DNS server in the network.
Description
Figure 5-8 DNS client
The page contains the following boxes:
●DNS Client
Enable or disable depending on whether the IE switch should operate as a DNS client.
●Name Server Address
Enter the IP address of the DNS server.
This table contains the following columns:
●Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
●Name Server Address
Shows the IP address of the DNS server.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 101
5.4.5 Restart
Resetting to the defaults
In this menu, there is a button with which you can restart the device and the option of resetting
to the device defaults.
Note
Note the following points about restarting a device:
● You can only restart the device with administrator privileges.
● A device should only be restarted with the buttons of this menu or with the appropriate
CLI commands and not by a power cycle on the device.
● Any modifications you have made only become active on the device after clicking the "Set
Values" button on the relevant WBM page. If the device is in "Trial Mode", configuration
modifications must be saved manually before a restart. In "Autosave mode", the last
changes are saved automatically before a restart.
Description of the displayed boxes
To restart the device, the buttons on this page provide you with the following options:
●"Restart System" button
Click this button to restart the system. You must confirm the restart in a dialog box. During
a restart, the device is reinitialized, the internal firmware is reloaded, and the device runs
a self-test. The learned entries in the address table are deleted. You can leave the browser
window open while the device restarts. You then need to log in again.
●"Restore Factory Defaults and Restart" button
Click this button to restore the factory defaults for the configuration. The protected defaults
are also reset.
An automatic restart is triggered.
Note
By resetting all the defaults to the factory settings, the IP address and the passwords are
also lost. Following this, the device can only be accessed using the Primary Setup Tool
or using DHCP.
With the appropriate attachment, a previously correctly configured device can cause
circulating frames and therefore the failure of the data traffic.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
102 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.6 Load & Save
5.4.6.1 HTTP
Loading and saving data via HTTP
The WBM allows you to store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load such
data from an external file from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you can
also load new firmware from a file located on your client PC.
Note
Incompatibility with predecessor versions
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed.
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed. In this
situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has the status "Not
Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous more up-to-date
firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date firmware without any loss
of configuration data. If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG
can be deleted or rewritten manually using System > PLUG.
Note
Configuration files and trial mode/Automatic Save mode
In Automatic Save mode, the data is saved automatically before the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config) are transferred.
In Trial mode, although the changes are adopted, they are not saved in the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config). Use the "Write Startup Config" button on the "System >
Configuration" WBM page to save changes in the configuration file.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 103
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Type
Shows the file type.
●Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
●Load
With this button, you can upload files to the device. The button can be enabled, if this
function is supported by the file type.
●Save
With this button, you can save files from the device. The button can only be enabled if this
function is supported by the file type and the file exists on the device.
●Delete
With this button, you can delete files from the device. The button can only be enabled if this
function is supported by the file type and the file exists on the device.
●Yes
Start the action
●No
The action is discarded.
Note
Following a firmware update, delete the cache of the Web browser.
Loading new firmware
After successfully downloading the firmware, you will be requested to restart the device.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
104 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Restart the device and continue to configure the newly started firmware.
Steps in configuration
Loading files using HTTP
1. Start the load function by clicking the one of the "Load" buttons.
The dialog for uploading a file opens.
2. Go to the file you want to upload.
3. Click the "Open" button in the dialog.
The file is now uploaded.
4. When the message "Restart required" appears, click the "OK" button to trigger the restart.
If you click the "Cancel" button, there is no device restart. The changes only take effect
after a restart.
Saving files using HTTP
1. Start the save function by clicking the one of the "Save" buttons.
2. You will be prompted to select a storage location and a name for the file. Or you accept the
proposed file name. To make the selection, use the dialog in your browser. After making
your selection, click the "Save" button.
Deleting files using HTTP
1. Start the delete function by clicking the one of the "Delete" buttons.
The file will be deleted.
Reusing configuration data
If several devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are assigned
using DHCP, the effort for configuration can be reduced by saving and reading in the
configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Download this configuration file to all other devices you want to configure in this way.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.
Note that the configuration data is coded when it is saved. This means that you cannot edit
the files with a text editor.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 105
5.4.6.2 TFTP
Loading and saving data via a TFTP server
On this page, you can configure the TFTP server and the file names. The WBM also allows
you to store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load such data from an
external file from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you can also load new
firmware from a file located on your client PC.
Note
Incompatibility with predecessor versions
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed.
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed. In this
situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has the status "Not
Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous more up-to-date
firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date firmware without any loss
of configuration data. If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG
can be deleted or rewritten manually using System > PLUG.
Note
Configuration files and trial mode/Automatic Save mode
In Automatic Save mode, the data is saved automatically before the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config) are transferred.
In Trial mode, although the changes are adopted, they are not saved in the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config). Use the "Write Startup Config" button on the "System >
Configuration" WBM page to save changes in the configuration file.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
106 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●"TFTP Server IP Address" input box
Here, enter the IP address of the TFTP server with which you exchange data.
●TFTP Server Port
Here, enter the port of the TFTP server over which data exchange will be handled. If
necessary, you can change the default value 69 to your own requirements.
The table has the following columns:
●Type
Shows the file type.
●Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
●"Filename" input box
A file name is preset here for every file type.
Note
Changing the file name
You can change the file name preset in this column. After clicking the "Set Values" button,
the changed name is stored on the device and can also be used with the Command Line
Interface.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 107
●"Actions" drop-down list
Select the action from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the selected file type,
for example the log file can only be saved.
The following actions are possible:
–Save file
With this selection, you save a file on the TFTP server.
–Load file
With this selection, you load a file from the TFTP server.
●"Yes" button
Perform the requested action.
●"No" button
The requested action is not performed
Loading new firmware
After successfully downloading the firmware, you will be requested to restart the device.
Restart the device and continue to configure the newly started firmware.
Steps in configuration
Loading or saving data using TFTP
1. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server IP Address" input box.
2. Enter the server port to be used in the in the "TFTP Server Port" input box.
3. Enter the name of a file in which you want to save the data or take the data from in the
"Filename" input box.
4. Select the action you want to execute from the "Actions" drop-down list.
5. Click the "Set Values" button to start the selected actions.
6. When the message "restart required" appears, click the "OK" button to trigger a restart on
the device. Click the "Cancel" button and there is no restart. The changes only take effect
after a restart.
Reusing configuration data
If several devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are assigned
using DHCP, the effort for configuration can be reduced by saving and reading in the
configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
108 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Download this configuration file to all other devices you want to configure in this way.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.
Note that the configuration data is coded when it is saved. This means that you cannot edit
the files with a text editor.
5.4.7 Events
5.4.7.1 Configuration
Selecting system events
On this page, you specify how a device reacts to system events. By enabling the appropriate
options, you specify how the device reacts to events. To enable or disable the options, click
the relevant check boxes of the columns.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 109
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●"Signaling Contact Method" drop-down list
Select the reaction of the signaling contact from the drop-down list. The following reactions
are possible:
– conventional
Default setting for the signaling contact. An error/fault is displayed by the fault LED and
the signaling contact is opened. When the error/fault state no longer exists, the fault
LED goes off and the signaling contact is closed.
– aligned
The way the signaling contact works depends on the error/fault that has occurred. The
signaling contact can be opened or closed as required by user actions.
●"Signaling Contact Status" drop-down list
Select the status of the signaling contact from the drop-down list. The following states are
possible:
– close
Signaling contact is closed.
– open
Signaling contact is opened.
The table has the following columns:
●E-Mail
The device sends an e-mail. This is only possible if the SMTP server is set up and the
"SMTP client" function is enabled.
●Trap
The device sends an SNMP trap. This is only possible if "SNMPv1 Traps" is enabled in
"System > Configuration".
●Log Table
The device writes an entry in the event log table, see "Information > Log Table"
●Syslog
The device writes an entry to the system log server. This is only possible if the system log
server is set up and the "Syslog client" function is enabled.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
110 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Fault
The device triggers a fault. The error LED lights up
●Event
The "Event" column contains the following values:
– Cold/Warm Start
The device was turned on or restarted by the user.
– Link Change
This event occurs only when the port status is monitored and has changed, see "System
> Fault Monitoring > Link Change".
– Authentication Failure
This event occurs when attempting access with a bad password.
– Power Change
This event occurs only when power supply lines 1 and 2 are monitored. It indicates that
there was a change to line 1 or line 2. See "System > Fault Monitoring > Power Supply".
– STP/RSTP/MSTP Change
The STP or RSTP or MSTP topology has changed.
– Fault State Change
The fault status has changed. The fault status can relate to the activated port monitoring,
the response of the signaling contact or the power supply monitoring.
– RMON Alarm
An alarm or event has occurred relating to the remote monitoring of the system.
– VRRP State Change (only when routing via VRRP)
The state of the virtual router has changed.
– Loop Detection
A loop was detected in the network segment.
– OSPF State Change
The status of OSPF has changed.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the check box in the row of the required event. Select the event in the column under
the following actions:
– E-mail
– Trap
– Log table
– Syslog
– Fault
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 111
5.4.7.2 Severity Filters
Setting the severity filter
On this page, set the threshold levels for sending system event notifications.
The first table column shows the client type for which you are making the settings:
●E-Mail
Sending system event messages by e-mail
●Log Table
Entry of system events in the log table
●Syslog
Entry of system events in the Syslog file
Select the required level from the drop-down lists of the second table column.
You can select from the following values:
●Critical
System events are processed as of the severity level "Critical".
●Warning
System events are processed as of the severity level "Warning".
●Info
System events are processed as of the severity level "Info".
Procedure
Follow the steps below to configure the required level:
1. Select the required values from the drop-down lists of the second table column after the
client types.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
112 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.8 SMTP client
Network monitoring with e-mails
The device provides the option of automatically sending an e-mail if an alarm event occurs (for
example to the network administrator). The e-mail contains the identification of the sending
device, a description of the cause of the alarm in plain language, and a time stamp. This allows
centralized network monitoring to be set up for networks with few nodes based on an E-mail
system. When an e-mail event message is received, the WBM can be started by the browser
using the identification of the sender to read out further diagnostics information. This is only
possible if there is an SMTP server in the internal network.
On this page, you can configure up to three SMTP servers and the corresponding e-mail
addresses.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●"SMTP Client" check box
Enable or disable the SMTP client.
●"'From'-Field" input box
Enter the name of the sender that will be included in the e-mail, for example the device
name.
●"SMTP Port" input box
Change the port if the SMTP server is not obtainable via port 25.
●"SMTP Server IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address of the SMTP server.
●"Send Test Mail" button
Sends an e-mail for testing.
This table contains the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 113
●1st column
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
●SMTP Server IP Address
Shows the SMTP server IP address.
●Receiver Email Address
Enter the e-mail address to which the device sends an e-mail if a fault occurs. The e-mail
address can be the address of a single person or a distribution list.
Procedure
1. Enable the "SMTP Client" option.
2. Enter the IP address of an NTP server in the "SMTP Server IP Address" input box.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. In the "Receiver Email Address" input box, enter the e-mail address to which the device
sends an e-mail if a fault occurs.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
Depending on the properties and configuration of the SMTP server, it may be necessary
to adapt the "'From'-Field” box for the e-mails. Check with the administrator of the SMTP
server.
5.4.9 DHCP client
Setting the DHCP mode
If the DHCP mode is activated, the DHCP client starts a DHCP request to a configured DHCP
server and is assigned an IP address as the response. The server manages an address range
from which it assigns IP addresses. It is also possible to configure the server so that the client
always receives the same IP address in response to its request.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
114 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●"DHCP Client Config File Request (Opt.66, 67)" check box
Select this option if you want the DHCP client to use options 66 and 67 to download and
then enable a configuration file.
●"DHCP Mode" drop-down list
Select the DHCP mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
– via MAC Address
Identification is based on the MAC address.
– via DHCP Client ID
Identification is based on a freely defined DHCP client ID.
– via System Name
Identification is based on the system name. If the system name is 255 characters long,
the last character is not used for identification.
●"DHCP" check box
Enable or disable the DHCP client for the relevant IP interface.
Procedure
Follow the steps below to configure the IP address using the DHCP client ID:
1. Enable the "DHCP Client" option.
2. Select the DHCP mode "via DHCP Client ID" from the "DHCP Mode" drop-down list.
3. Enter a character string to identify the device in the enabled "DHCP Client ID" input box.
This is then evaluated by the DHCP server.
4. Select the "Client Config File Request (Opt.66, 67)" option, if you want the DHCP client to
use options 66 and 67 to download and then enable a configuration file.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
If a configuration file is downloaded, this triggers a system restart. Make sure that the
option "Client Config File Request (Opt.66, 67)" is no longer set in this configuration file.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 115
5.4.10 SNMP
5.4.10.1 General
Configuration of SNMP
On this page, you make the basic settings for SNMP. Enable the check boxes according to
the function you want to use.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●"SNMPv1/v2c/v3" drop-down list
Select the SNMP protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (disabled)
SNMP is disabled.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
SNMPv1/v2c/v3 is supported.
– SNMPv3
Only SNMPv3 is supported.
●"SNMPv1/v2c Read Only" check box
If you enable this option, SNMPv1/v2c can only read the SNMP variables.
Note
Community String
For security reasons, do not use the standard values "public" or "private". Change the
community strings following the initial installation.
●"SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community String" input box
Enter the community string for read and write access of the SNMP protocol.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
116 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●"SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String" input box
Enter the community string for access of the SNMP protocol.
●"SNMPv1 Traps" check box
Enable or disable the sending of traps (alarm frames). On the "Trap" tab, specify the IP
addresses of the devices to which SNMP traps will be sent.
●"SNMPv1/v2c Trap Community String" input box
Enter the community string for sending SNMPv1/v2 messages.
Procedure
1. Select the required option from the "SNMP" drop-down list:
– "-" (disabled)
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
– SNMPv3
2. Enable the "SNMPv1/v2c Read only" check box if you only want read access to SNMP
variables with SNMPv1/v2c.
3. Enter the required character string in the "SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String" input box.
4. Enter the required character string in the "SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community String"
input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.10.2 Traps
SNMP traps for alarm events
If an alarm event occurs, a device can send SNMP traps (alarm frames) to up to ten different
management stations at the same time. Traps are only sent if the events specified in the
"Events" menu occur.
Note
Traps are sent only when the "SNMPv1 Traps" option was selected in the "General" or
"System > Confguration" tab.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 117
Description
●IP Address
Enter the IP address of the station to which the device sends SNMP traps. You can specify
up to ten different IP addresses for various recipients.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●IP Address
If necessary, change the IP addresses of the stations.
●Trap
Enable or disable the sending of traps. Stations that are entered but not selected do not
receive SNMP traps.
Procedure
Creating a trap entry
1. In "IP Address", enter the IP address of the station to which the device sends SNMP traps.
2. Click the "Create" button to create a new trap entry.
3. Select the check box for the corresponding IP address.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting a trap entry
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
118 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.10.3 Groups
Security settings and assigning permissions
SNMP version 3 allows permissions to be assigned, authentication, and encryption at protocol
level. The security levels and read/write permissions are assigned according to groups. The
settings automatically apply to every member of a group.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●Group Name
Enter the name of the group. The maximum length is 32 characters.
●Security Level
Select the security level (authentication, encryption) valid for
the selected group. In the security levels, the following options:
– No Auth/no Priv
No authentication enabled, no encryption enabled.
– Auth/no Priv
Authentication enabled / no encryption enabled.
– Auth/Priv
Authentication enabled / encryption enabled.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Group Name
Shows the defined group names.
●Security Level
Shows the configured security level.
●Read
Enable or disable read access for the required group.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 119
●Write
Enable or disable wite access for the required group.
Note
For write access to work, you also need to enable read access.
●Persistence
Shows whether or not the group is assigned to an SNMPv3 user. If the group is not assigned
to an SNMPv3 user, no automatic saving is triggered and the configured group disappears
again after restarting the device.
– Yes
The group is assigned to an SNMPV3 user.
– No
The group is not assigned to an SNMPV3 user.
Procedure
Creating a new group
1. Enter the required group name in "Group Name".
2. Select the required security level from the "Security Level" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button to create a new entry.
4. Specify the required read rights for the group in " Read".
5. Specify the required write rights for the group in " Write".
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Modifying a group
1. Specify the required read rights for the group in " Read".
2. Specify the required write rights for the group in " Write".
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
Once a group name and the security level have been specified, they can no longer be
modified after the group is created. If you want to change the group name or the security
level , you will need to delete the group and recreate it and reconfigure it with the new
name.
Deleting a group
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all groups you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
120 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.10.4 Users
User-specific security settings
On the WBM page, you can create new SNMPv3 users and modify or delete existing users.
The user-based security model works with the concept of the user name; in other words, a
user ID is added to every frame. This user name and the applicable security settings are
checked by both the sender and recipient.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●User Name
Enter a freely selectable user name. After you have entered the data, you can no longer
modify the name.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●User Name
Shows the created users.
●Group Name
Select the group to which the user will be assigned.
●Authentication Protocol
Specify the authentication protocol. Can only be enabled, if this group supports the function.
The following settings are available:
– none
– MD5
– SHA
●Privacy Protocol
Specify whether or not the user uses the DES algorithm. Can only be enabled, if the group
supports this function.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 121
●Authentication Password
Enter the authentication password in the first input box. This password must have at least
6 characters, the maximum length is 32 characters.
●Authentication Password Confirmation
Confirm the password by repeating the entry.
●Privacy Password
Enter your encryption password. This password must have at least 6 characters, the
maximum length is 32 characters.
●Privacy Password Confirmation
Confirm the encryption password by repeating the entry.
●Persistence
Shows whether or not the user is assigned to an SNMPv3 group. If the user is not assigned
to an SNMPv3 group, no automatic saving is triggered and the configured user disappears
again after restarting the device.
– Yes
The user is assigned to an SNMPv3 group.
– No
The user is not assigned to an SNMPv3 group.
Procedure
Create a new user
1. Enter the name of the new user in the "User Name" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
3. In "Groups", select the group to which the new user will belong.
If the group has not yet been created, change to the "v3 Groups" page and make the settings
for this group.
4. If an authentication is necessary for the selected group, select the authentication algorithm
in "Authentification Protocol".
In the relevant input boxes, enter the authentication password and its confirmation.
5. If encryption was specified for the group, select the algorithm from the "Privacy Protocol"
drop-down list. In the relevant input boxes, enter the encryption password and the
confirmation.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Delete user
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all users you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.
Note
If you click a different button prior to this step (for example the "Refresh" button), the delete
action is canceled. The data of the selected rows is retained. The selections are removed.
If you want to repeat the action, you will need to reselect the data records to be deleted.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
122 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.11 System time
There are different methods that can be used to set the system time of the device. Only one
method can be active at any one time.
If one method is activated, the previously activated method is automatically deactivated.
5.4.11.1 Manual setting
Manual setting of the system time
On this page, you set the date and time of the system yourself. For this setting to be used,
enable "Time Manually".
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●Time Manually
Enable or disable manual setting of the time. If you enable the option, the "System Time"
input box can be edited.
●System Time
Enter the date and time in the format "MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS".
After a restart, the time of day begins at 01/01/2000 00:00:00
●Use PC Time
Click the button to use the time setting of the PC.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 123
●Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place. If
no time-of-day synchronization was possible, the box displays "Date/time not set".
●Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed.
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
– PTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with PTP
Procedure
1. Enable the "Time Manually" option.
2. Click in the "System Time" input box.
3. In the "System Time" input box, enter the date and time in the format "MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS".
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
The date and time are adopted and "Manual" is entered in the "Last Synchronization
Mechanism" box.
5.4.11.2 DST Overview
On this page, you can create new entries for the daylight saving time changeover.
The table provides an overview of the existing entries.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
124 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Settings
Figure 5-9 DST Overview
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●DST No.
Shows the number of the entry.
If you create a new entry, a new line with a unique number is created.
●Name
Shows the name of the entry.
●Year
Shows the year for which the entry was created.
●Start Date
Shows the month, day and time for the start of daylight saving time.
●End Date
Shows the month, day and time for the end of daylight saving time.
●Type
Shows how the daylight saving time changeover is made:
– Date
A fixed date is entered for the daylight saving time changeover.
– Recurring
A rule was defined for the daylight saving time changeover.
5.4.11.3 DST Configuration
On this page, you can configure the entries for the daylight saving time changeover. As result
of the changeover to daylight saving or standard time, the system time for the local time zone
is correctly set.
You can define a rule for the daylight saving time changeover or specify a fixed date.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 125
Settings
Note
The content of this page depends on the selection in the "Type" box.
The boxes "DST No.", "Type" and "Name" are always displayed.
●DST No.
Select the type of the entry.
●Type
Select how the daylight saving time changeover is made:
– Date
You can set a fixed date for the daylight saving time changeover.
This setting is suitable for regions in which the daylight saving time changeover is not
governed by rules.
– Recurring
You can define a rule for the daylight saving time changeover.
This setting is suitable for regions in which the daylight saving time always begins or
ends on a certain weekday.
●Name
Enter a name for the entry.
Settings with "Date" selected
Figure 5-10 DST Configuration Date
You can set a fixed date for the start and end of daylight saving time.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
126 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Year
Enter the year for the daylight saving time changeover.
●Start Date
Enter the following values for the start of daylight saving time:
– Day
Specify the day.
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
●End Date
Enter the following values for the end of daylight saving time:
– Day
Specify the day.
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
Settings with "Recurring" selected
Figure 5-11 DST Configuration Recurring
You can create a rule for the daylight saving time changeover.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 127
●Start Date
Enter the following values for the start of daylight saving time:
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
– Week
Specify the week.
You can select the 1st to 5th or the last week of the month.
– Weekday
Specify the weekday.
●End Date
Enter the following values for the end of daylight saving time:
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
– Week
Specify the week.
You can select the 1st to 5th or the last week of the month.
– Weekday
Specify the weekday.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
128 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.11.4 SNTP client
Time-of-day synchronization in the network
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is used for synchronizing the time in the network. The
appropriate frames are sent by an SNTP server in the network.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●SNTP Client
Enable or disable automatic time-of-day synchronization using SNTP.
●Current System Time
Shows the values currently set in the system for date and time.
●Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 129
●Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
– PTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with PTP
●Time Zone
Enter the time zone you are using in the format "+/- HH:MM". The time zone relates to UTC
standard world time. Settings for daylight-saving and standard time are taken into account
in this box by specifying the time offset.
●SNTP Mode
Select the synchronization mode from the drop-down list. The following types of
synchronization are possible:
– Poll
If you select this protocol type, the input boxes "SNTP Server IP Address", "SNTP Server
Port" and "Poll Interval(s)" are displayed for further configuration. With this type of
synchronization, the device is active and sends a time query to the SNTP server.
– Listen
With this type of synchronization, the device is passive and "listens" for SNTP frames
that deliver the time of day.
●SNTP Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the SNTP server.
●SNTP Server Port
Enter the port of the SNTP server.
The following ports are possible:
– 123 (standard port)
– 1025 to 36564
●Poll Interval(s)
Here, enter the interval between two-time queries. In this box, you enter the query interval
in seconds. Possible values are 16 to 16284 seconds.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
130 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Procedure
1. Click the "SNTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting.
2. In the "Time Zone" input box, enter the local time difference to world time (UTC). The input
format is "+/-HH:MM" (for example +02:00 for CEST), because the SNTP server always
sends the UTC time. This time is then recalculated and displayed as the local time based
on the specified time zone. On the device itself, there is no changeover from the daylight
saving to standard time. You also need to take this into account when completing the "Time
Zone" input box.
3. Select one of the following options from the "SNTP Mode" drop-down list:
– Poll
For this mode, you need to configure the following:
- time zone difference (step 2)
- time server (step 4)
- Port (step 5)
- query interval (step 6)
- complete the configuration with step 7.
– Listen
For this mode, you need to configure the following:
- time difference to the time sent by the server (step 2)
- complete the configuration with step 7.
4. In the "SNTP Server IP Address" input box, enter the IP address of the SNTP server whose
frames will be used to synchronize the time of day.
5. In the "SNTP Server Port" input box, enter the port via which the SNTP server is available.
The port can only be modified if the IP address of the SNTP server is entered.
6. In the "Poll Interval(s)" input box, enter the time in seconds after which a new time query
is sent to the time server.
7. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer your changes to the device.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 131
5.4.11.5 NTP client
Automatic time-of-day setting with NTP
If you require time-of-day synchronization using NTP, you can make the relevant settings here.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●NTP Client
Select this check box to enable automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP.
●Current System Time
This box displays the current system time.
●Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
132 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
– PTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with PTP
●Time Zone
In this box, enter the time zone you are using in the format "+/- HH:MM". The time zone
relates to UTC standard world time. Settings for daylight-saving and standard time are taken
into account in this box by specifying the time offset.
●NTP Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
●NTP Server Port
Enter the port of the NTP server.
The following ports are possible:
– 123 (standard port)
– 1025 to 36564
●Poll Interval(s)
Here, enter the interval between two-time queries. In this box, you enter the query interval
in seconds. Possible values are 64 to 1024 seconds.
Procedure
1. Click the "NTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting using NTP.
2. Enter the necessary values in the following boxes:
– Time zone
– NTP server IP address
– NTP server port
– Query interval
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 133
5.4.11.6 SIMATIC time client
Time setting via SIMATIC time client
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●SIMATIC Time Client
Select this check box to enable the device as a SIMATIC time client.
●Current System Time
This box displays the current system time.
●Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
●Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
– PTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with PTP
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
134 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Procedure
1. Click the "SIMATIC Time Client" check box to enable the SIMATIC Time Client.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.11.7 PTP Client (SCALANCE XR-500 only)
Automatic time-of-day setting with PTP
If you require time-of-day synchronization using PTP, you can make the relevant settings here.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●PTP Client
Select this check box to enable automatic time-of-day synchronization with PTP.
●Current System Time
This box displays the current system time.
●Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 135
●Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame.
– PTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with PTP
●Time Zone
In this box, enter the time zone you are using in the format "+/- HH:MM". The time zone
relates to UTC standard world time. Settings for daylight-saving and standard time are taken
into account in this box by specifying the time offset.
Procedure
1. Click the "PTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting using PTP.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.12 Auto logout
Setting the automatic logout
On this page, set the times after which there is an automatic logout from WBM or the CLI
following user in activity.
If you have been logged out automatically, you will need to log in again.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
136 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Configuration
1. Enter a value of 60-3600 seconds in the "Web Base Management [s]" input box. If you enter
the value 0, the automatic logout is disabled.
2. Enter a value of 60-600 seconds in the "CLI (TELNET, SSH, Serial) [s]" input box. If you
enter the value 0, the automatic logout is disabled.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.13 Select/Set button configuration
Description of the Select/Set button
The "Select/Set" button is used for the following:
● Changing the display mode,
● Resetting to factory defaults,
● Defining the fault mask and the LED display,
You will find a detailed description of the individual functions available with the buttons in the
device operating instructions.
On this page, the functionality of the Select/Set button can be restricted or fully disabled.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 137
Description of the displayed boxes
The following functions are possible:
●"Restore Factory Defaults" check box
Enable or disable the function "Restore Factory Defaults" function with the Select/Set
button.
CAUTION
"Restore Factory Defaults" button function active during startup
If you have disabled this function in your configuration, disabling is only valid during
operation. When restarting, for example after power down, the function is active until the
configuration is loaded so that the device can inadvertently be reset to the factory settings.
This may cause unwanted disruption in network operation since the device needs to be
reconfigured if this occurs. An inserted PLUG is also deleted and returned to the status
as shipped.
●"Set Fault Mask" check box
Enable or disable the function "Define fault mask via the LED display" with the Select/Set
button.
●"Redundancy Manager" check box
Enables/disables the redundancy manager function.
Steps in configuration
1. To use the required functionality, select the corresponding check box.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.14 Syslog client
System event agent
Syslog according to RFC 3164 is used for transferring short, unencrypted text messages over
UDP in the IP network. This requires a Syslog server.
Requirements for sending log entries:
● The Syslog function is enabled on the device.
● The Syslog function is enabled for the relevant event.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
138 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
● There is a Syslog server in your network that receives the log entries. (Since this is a UDP
connection, there is no acknowledgment to the sender)
● The IP address of the Syslog server is entered on the device.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●Syslog Client
Enable or disable the Syslog function.
●Server IP Address
Here, enter, the IP address of the Syslog server.
This table contains the following columns
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Server Address
Shows the IP address of the Syslog server.
●Server Port
Enter the port of the Syslog server being used.
Procedure
Enabling function
1. Select the "Syslog Client" check box.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Creating a new entry
1. In the "Server IP Address" input box, enter the IP address of the Syslog server on which
the log entries will be saved.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 139
3. In the "Server Port" input box, enter the number of the UDP port of the server.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
The default setting of the server port is 514.
Changing the entry
1. Delete the entry.
2. Create a new entry.
Deleting an entry
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. All selected entries are deleted and the display is refreshed.
5.4.15 Ports
5.4.15.1 Overview
Overview of the port configuration
The page shows the configuration for the data transfer for all ports of the device. You cannot
configure anything on this page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
140 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the configurable ports. The entry is a link. If you click on the link, the corresponding
configuration page is opened. The port is made up of the module number and the port
number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Port Name
Shows the name of the port.
●Port type (only with routing)
Shows the type of the port. The following types are possible:
– Router port
– Switch Port VLAN Hybrid
– Switch-Port VLAN Trunk
●Combo Port Media Type (SCALANCE XM400 only)
This column contains a value only with combo ports.
Shows the mode of the combo port:
– auto
– rj45
– sfp
●Status
Shows whether the port is on or off. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled port.
●Link
Shows the connection status to the network. With the connection status, the following is
possible:
– Up
The port has a valid link to the network, a link integrity signal is being received.
– Down
The link is down, for example because the connected device is turned off.
●Mode
Shows the transfer parameters of the port.
●MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit)
Shows the packet size.
●Negotiation
Shows whether the automatic configuration is enabled or disabled.
●Flow Ctrl. Type
Shows whether flow control is enabled or disabled for the port.
●Flow Ctrl.
Shows whether flow control is working on this port.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the port.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 141
5.4.15.2 Configuration
Configuring ports
With this page, you can configure all the ports of the device.
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following rows:
●Port
Select the port to be configured from the drop-down list. The port is made up of the module
number and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Status
Specify whether the port is enabled or disabled.
– enabled
The port is enabled. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled port.
– disabled
The port is disabled but the connection remains.
– link down
The port is disabled and the connection to the partner device is terminated.
●Port Name
Enter a name for the port.
●MAC address
Shows the MAC address of the port.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
142 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Mode Type
From this drop-down list, select the transmission speed and the transmission method of
the port. If you set the mode to "Auto negotiation", these parameters are automatically
negotiated with the connected end device. This must also be in the "Autonegotiation" mode.
Note
Before the port and partner port can communicate with each other, the settings must match
at both ends.
Note
"Mode Type" with combo ports
To be able to set the "Mode Type" of a combo port, change the "Combo Port Media Type"
to "rj45".
If "auto" is set for the "Combo Port Media Type" and the RJ-45 port is used, you cannot
set the "Mode Type".
●Mode
Shows the transmission speed and the transmission method of the port. The transmission
speed can be 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1000 Mbps or 10 Gbps. As the transmission mode, you
can configure full duplex (FD) or half duplex (HD).
●Negotiation
Shows whether the automatic configuration of the connection to the partner port is enabled
or disabled.
Note
Turning flow control on/off with autonegotiation
Flow control can only be enabled or disabled if the "autonegotiation" function is turned off.
The function cannot enabled again afterwards.
●Flow Ctrl. Type
Enable or disable flow control for the port.
●Flow Ctrl.
Shows whether flow control is working on this port.
●MTU
Enter the packet size.
●Port Type (only with routing)
Select the type of port from the drop-down list.
– Router port
The port is a layer 3 interface. It does not support layer 2 functions.
– Switch Port VLAN Hybrid
The port sends tagged and untagged frames. It is not automatically a member of a VLAN.
– Switch-Port VLAN Trunk
The port only sends tagged frames and is automatically a member of all VLANs.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 143
●Combo Port Media Type (SCALANCE XM400 only)
Specify the mode of the combo port:
– auto
If you select this mode, the SFP transceiver port has priority.
As soon as an SFP transceiver is plugged in, an existing connection at the fixed RJ-45
port is terminated. If no SFC transceiver is plugged in, a connection can be established
via the fixed RJ-45 port.
– rj45
If you select this mode, the fixed RJ-45 port is used regardless of the SFP transceiver
port.
If an SFP transceiver is plugged in, it is disabled and the power turned off.
– sfp
If you select this mode, the SFP transceiver port is used regardless of the built-in RJ-45
port.
If an RJ-45 connection is established, it is terminated because the power of the RJ-45
port is turned off.
The factory setting for the combo ports is auto mode.
●Link
Shows the connection status to the network. The available options are as follows:
– Up
The port has a valid link to the network, a link integrity signal is being received.
– Down
The link is down, for example because the connected device is turned off.
Changing the port configuration
Click the appropriate box to change the configuration.
Note
Optical ports only work with the full duplex mode and at maximum transmission rate. As a
result, the following settings cannot be made for optical ports:
● Automatic configuration
● Transmission speed
● Transmission technique
Note
With various automatic functions, the device prevents or reduces the effect on other ports
and priority classes (Class of Service) if a port is overloaded. This can mean that frames are
discarded even when flow control is enabled.
Port overload occurs when the device receives more frames than it can send, for example
as the result of different transmission speeds.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
144 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Changing combo port settings for PROFINET
As default, combo ports have the "auto" setting for the "Combo Port Media Type" parameter.
If you use combo ports with the "auto" setting with PROFINET, you cannot, for example, set
the transmission rate.
If you use PROFINET, change the "Combo Port Media Type" parameter setting to "sfp" or
"rj45".
Steps in configuration
1. Change the settings according to your configuration.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.16 Fault monitoring
5.4.16.1 Power Supply
Settings for monitoring the power supply
Configure whether or not the power supply should be monitored by the messaging system.
Depending on the hardware variant there are one or two power connectors (Line 1 / Line 2).
With a redundant power supply, configure the monitoring separately for each individual feed-
in line.
A fault is then signaled by the message system when there is no power on one of the monitored
lines (line 1 or line 2) or when the voltage is too low.
Note
You will find the permitted operating voltage limits in the compact operating instructions of
the device.
A fault causes the signaling contact to trigger and the fault LED on the device to light up and,
depending on the configuration, can trigger a trap, an e-mail, or an entry in the event log table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 145
Procedure
1. Click the check box in front of the line name you want to monitor to enable or disable the
monitoring function.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.16.2 Link Change
Configuration of fault monitoring of status changes on connections
On this page, you configure whether or not an error message is triggered if there is a status
change on a network connection.
If connection monitoring is enabled, an error is signaled
● when there should be a link on a port and this is missing.
● or when there should not be a link on a port and a link is detected.
A fault causes the signaling contact to trigger and the fault LED on the device to light up and,
depending on the configuration, can trigger a trap, an e-mail, or an entry in the event log table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
146 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– "-" (disabled)
– Up
– Down
– No Change: The setting in table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the available ports and link aggregations. The port is made up of the module number
and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following options:
– Up
Error handling is triggered when the port changes to the active status.
(From "Link down" to "Link up")
– Down
Error handling is triggered when the port changes to the inactive status.
(From "Link up" to "Link down")
– "-" (disabled)
The error handling is not triggered.
Steps in configuration
Configure error monitoring for a port
1. From the relevant drop-down list, select the options of the slots / ports whose connection
status you want to monitor.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configure error monitoring for all ports
1. Select the required setting from the drop-down list of the "Setting"column.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 147
5.4.16.3 Redundancy
On this page, you configure whether or not an error message is triggered if there is a status
change on a network connection.
Setting
●Redundancy Lost (HRP only)
Enable or disable connection monitoring. If the redundancy of the connection is lost, an
error is signaled.
5.4.17 PNIO
Settings for PROFINET IO
This page shows the PROFINET IO AR status and the device name.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
148 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●PNIO AR Status
This box shows the status of the PROFINET IO connection; in other words whether the
device is connected to a PROFINET IO controller "Online " or "Offline".
Here, online means that a connection to a PROFINET IO controller exists, that this has
downloaded its configuration data to the device and that the device can send status data
to the PROFINET IO controller. In this status known as "in data exchange", the parameters
set with the PROFINET IO controller cannot be configured.
●PNIO Name of Station
This box displays the PROFINET IO device name according to the configuration in HW
Config of STEP 7.
5.4.18 PLUG configuration
NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG during operation!
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether or not a PLUG is present at one second intervals. If it is detected
that the PLUG was removed, there is a restart. If a valid KEY-PLUG was inserted in the
device, the device changes to a defined error state following the restart.
Information about the configuration of the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
This page provides detailed information about the configuration stored on the C-PLUG or KEY-
PLUG. It is also possible to reset the PLUG to "factory defaults" or to load it with new contents.
Note
The action is only executed after you click the "Set Values" button.
The action cannot be undone.
If you decide against executing the function after making your selection, click the "Refresh"
button. As a result the data of this page is read from the device again and the selection is
canceled.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 149
Note
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed. In this
situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has the status "Not
Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous more up-to-date
firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date firmware without any loss
of configuration data.
If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or
rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
150 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following rows:
●State
Shows the status of the PLUG. The following are possible:
– ACCEPTED
There is a PLUG with a valid and suitable configuration in the device.
– NOT ACCEPTED
Invalid or incompatible configuration on the inserted PLUG.
– NOT PRESENT
There is no C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG inserted in the device.
– FACTORY
PLUG is inserted and does not contain a configuration. This status is also displayed
when the PLUG was formatted during operation.
– MISSING
There is no PLUG inserted. Functions are configured on the device for which a license
is required.
●Device Group
Shows the SIMATIC NET product line that used the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG previously.
●Device Type
Shows the device type within the product line that used the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG
previously.
●Configuration Revision
The version of the configuration structure. This information relates to the configuration
options supported by the device and has nothing to do with the concrete hardware
configuration. This revision information does not therefore change if you add or remove
additional components (modules or extenders), it can, however, change if you update the
firmware.
●File System
Displays the type of file system on the PLUG.
NOTICE
New file system UBI
As of firmware version 3.0, UBI is the standard file system for the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG.
If a C-PLUG with the previous file system IECP is detected in such a device, this C-PLUG
will be formatted for the UBI file system and the data will be rewritten to the C-PLUG.
The file system is also changed following a firmware update to V3.0. A downgrade to the
previous version of the corresponding software is then a problem. The firmware can
neither read nor write the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG and it is not even possible to "Erase
PLUG to Factory Default".
●File System Size [byte]
Displays the maximum storage space of the file system on the PLUG.
●File System Usage [byte]
Shows the storage space being utilized in the PLUG file system.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 151
●Info String
Shows additional information about the device that used the PLUG previously, for example,
order number, type designation, and the versions of the hardware and software. The
displayed software version corresponds to the version in which the configuration was last
changed. With the "NOT ACCEPTED" status, further information on the cause of the
problem is displayed.
●"Modify PLUG" drop-down list
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following options for changing the
configuration on the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG:
– Write current configuration to PLUG
This option is available only if the status of the PLUG is "NOT ACCEPTED" or
"FACTORY".
The configuration in the internal flash memory of the device is copied to the PLUG.
– Erase PLUG to factory default
Deletes all data from the C-PLUG and triggers low-level formatting.
Steps in configuration
1. You can only make settings in this box if you are logged on as "Administrator". Here, you
decide how you want to change the content of the PLUG.
2. Select the required option from the "Modify PLUG" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.4.19 PLUG license
NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG during operation!
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether or not a PLUG is present at one second intervals. If it is detected
that the PLUG was removed, there is a restart. If a valid KEY-PLUG was inserted in the
device, the device changes to a defined error state following the restart.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory settings.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
152 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Note
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed. In this
situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has the status "Not
Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous more up-to-date
firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date firmware without any loss
of configuration data.
If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or
rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
Information about the license of the KEY-PLUG
A C-PLUG can only store the configuration of a device. In addition to the configuration, a KEY-
PLUG also contains a license that enables certain functions of your SIMATIC NET device.
This page provides detailed information about the license on the KEY-PLUG. In this example,
the KEY-PLUG contains the data for enabling the layer 3 functions of the device.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 153
Description of the displayed boxes
●State
Shows the status of the KEY-PLUG. The following are possible:
– ACCEPTED
The KEY-PLUG in the device contains a suitable and valid license.
– NOT ACCEPTED
The license of the inserted KEY-PLUG is not valid.
– NOT PRESENT
No KEY-PLUG is inserted in the device.
– MISSING
There is no KEY-PLUG or a C-PLUG with the status "FACTORY" inserted in the device.
Functions are configured on the device for which a license is required.
– WRONG
The inserted KEY-PLUG is not suitable for the device.
– UNKNOWN
Unknown content of the KEY-PLUG.
– DEFECTIVE
The content of the KEY-PLUG contains errors.
●Order ID
Shows the order number of the KEY-PLUG. The KEY-PLUG is available for various
functional enhancements and for various target systems.
●Serial Number
Shows the serial number of the KEY-PLUG.
●Info String
Shows additional information about the device that used the KEY-PLUG previously, for
example, order number, type designation, and the versions of the hardware and software.
The displayed software version corresponds to the version in which the configuration was
last changed. With the "NOT ACCEPTED" status, further information on the cause of the
problem is displayed.
Note
When you save the configuration, the information about whether or not a KEY-PLUG was
inserted in the device at the time is also saved. This configuration can then only work if a
KEY-PLUG with the same order number / license is inserted.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
154 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.4.20 Ping
Reachability of an address in an IP network
With the ping function, you can check whether a certain IP address is reachable in the network.
Description
The table has the following columns:
●"IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address of the device.
●"Repeat" input box
Enter the number of ping requests.
●"Ping" button
Click this button to start the ping function.
●Ping Output
This box shows the output of the ping function.
●"Clear" button
Click this button to empty the "Ping Output" box.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 155
5.4.21 PoE
5.4.21.1 General
Settings for Power over Ethernet (PoE)
On this page, you see information about the power that the IE switch supplies with PoE.
The SCALANCE X-500 represents a PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment). With the SCALANCE
XM400, each group of four ports with PoE capability is known as a PSE. The displayed value
applies only to the corresponding PSE.
Description of the displayed boxes
●PSE (read-only)
Shows the number of the PSE.
●Maximum Power [W] (read-only)
Maximum power that a PSE provides to supply PoE devices.
The "Maximum Power" value can be set for a SCALANCE XM-400.
●Allocated Power [W] (read-only)
Sum of the power reserved by the PoE devices according to the "Classification".
●Power in Use [W] (read-only)
Sum of the power used by the end devices.
●Usage Threshold [%]
As soon as the power being used by the end devices exceeds the percentage shown here,
an event is triggered.
Power over Ethernet with SCALANCE XM-400
With a SCALANCE XM-400, you can use the "Power over Ethernet" function via the port
extender PE408PoE.
PoE power supply
The connection of the PoE power supply is external. You can connect 2 PoE power supplies
with each PE408PoE port extender. Each PE408PoE therefore has 2 PSE units (Power
Sourcing Equipment) each with 4 ports.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
156 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Numbering of the PSE units
To be able to differentiate between the PSE units in the configuration, they are numbered:
Figure 5-12 SCALANCE XM-400 with 2 PE408PoE port extenders
If a PE408PoE is inserted in slot 2, its two PSE slots have indexes 1 and 2. If a PE408PoE is
inserted in slot 3, its two PSE slots have indexes 3 and 4.
The numbering of the PSE units is decided by the slots. If there is a port extender without PoE
in slot 2, and there is a PE408PoE in slot 3, the PSE units in slot 3 still have the indexes 3 and
4.
Figure 5-13 SCALANCE XM-400 with 2 port extenders (1 port extender without PoE and 1 PE408PoE)
With a SCALANCE XM416-4C with which you can only connect one port extender, the indexes
of the PSE units are 1 and 2.
5.4.21.2 Port
Settings for the ports
For each individual PoE port, you can specify whether or not the power will be supplied via
Ethernet. You can also set a priority for each connected powered device (PD). Devices for
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 157
which a high priority was set, take preference over other devices for the power supply.
On this page, you can see detailed information on the individual PoE ports.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains two tables. In table 1, you can make settings and assign them to all ports
at the same time. In table 2, you can make different settings for each port.
Table 1 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Enables the function
– disabled
Disables the function
– No Change
The setting in table 2 remains unchanged
●Priority
Select the priority of the ports from the drop-down list. If you set the priority in table 1 and
copy the values to table 2, all ports will have the same priority.
The following settings are possible, in ascending order of relevance:
– low
low priority
– high
medium priority
– critical
high priority
– No Change
The setting in table 2 remains unchanged
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
158 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Type
Here, you can enter a string to describe the connected device in greater detail. The
maximum length is 255 characters.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the configurable PoE ports.
The port is made up of the module number and the port number, for example port 0.1 is
module 0, port 1.
●Setting
Enable the PoE power supply for this port or interrupt it.
●Priority
From the drop-down list, select which priority this port will have for the power supply.
The following settings are possible, in ascending order of relevance:
– low
– high
– critical
If the same priority is set for two ports, the port with the lower number will be preferred when
necessary.
●Type
Here, you can enter a string to describe the connected device in greater detail. The
maximum length is 255 characters.
●Classification (read-only)
The classification specifies the class of the device. From this, it is possible to recognize the
maximum power of the device.
●Status (read-only)
Shows the current status of the port.
The following states are possible:
– disabled
The PoE power supply is deactivated for this port.
– delivering Power
The PoE power supply is activated for this port and a device is connected.
– searching
The PoE power supply is activated for this port but there is no device connected.
Note
If a device is connected to a port with PoE capability, a check is made to determine whether
the power of the port is adequate for the connected device.
If the power of the port is inadequate, although PoE is enabled in Setting, the port
nevertheless has the status disabled. This means that the port was disabled by the PoE
power management.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 159
●Power [mW] (read-only)
Shows the power that the SCALANCE provides for this port.
●Voltage [V] (read-only)
Shows the voltage applied to this port.
●Current [mA] (read-only)
Shows the current with which a device connected to this port is supplied.
5.4.22 Port Diagnostics
5.4.22.1 Cable tester
With this page, each individual Ethernet port can run independent fault diagnostics on the
cable. This test is performed without needing to remove the cable, connect a cable tester and
install a loopback module at the other end. Short-circuits and cable breaks can be localized to
within a few meters.
Note
Please note that this test is permitted only when no data connection is established on the
port to be tested.
If, however, there is a data connection to the port to be tested, this is briefly interrupted.
Automatic re-establishment of the connection can fail and then needs to be done manually.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
160 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●"Port" drop-down list
Select the port to be configured from the drop-down list.
●"Run Test" button
Activates error diagnostics. The result is shown in the table.
This table contains the following columns:
●Pair
Shows the wire pair in the cable.
Note
Wire pairs
Wire pairs 4-5 and 7-8 of 10/100 Mbps network cables are not used.
1000 Mbps or gigabit Ethernet uses all 4 wire pairs.
The wire pair assignment - pin assignment is as follows (DIN 50173):
Pair 1 = pin 4-5
Pair 2 = pin 1-2
Pair 3 = pin 3-6
Pair 4 = pin 7-8
●Status
Displays the status of the cable.
●Distance [m]
Displays the distance to the cable end, cable break, or short-circuit.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 161
5.4.22.2 SFP diagnostics
On this page, you run independent error diagnostics for each individual SFP port. This test is
performed without needing to remove the cable, connect a cable tester or install a loopback
module at the other end.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
●Port
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
●Refresh
Refreshes the display of the values of the set port. The result is shown in the table.
The values are shown in the following boxes:
●Name
Shows the name of the interface.
●Model
Shows the type of interface.
●Revision
Shows the hardware version of the SFP.
●Serial
Shows the serial number of the SFP
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
162 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Nominal Bit Rate [MBit/s]
Shows the nominal bit rate of the interface.
●Max. Link (50.0/125um) [m]
Shows the maximum distance in meters that is possible with this medium.
●Max. Link (62.5/125um) [m]
Shows the maximum distance in meters that is possible with this medium.
The following table shows the values of the SFP transceiver used in this port:
●Temperature [°C]
Shows the temperature of the interface.
●Voltage [V]
Shows the voltage applied to the interface [V].
●Current [mA]
Shows the current consumption of the interface [mA].
●Rx Power[uW]
Shows the receive power of the interface [mW].
●Tx Power[uW]
Shows the transmit power of the interface [mW].
●Current column
Shows the current value.
●Low column
Shows the lowest value.
●High column
Shows the highest value.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 The "System" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 163
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
5.5.1 Configuration
Configuring layer 2
On this page, you create a basic configuration for the functions of layer 2. On the configuration
pages of these functions, you can make detailed settings. You can also check the settings on
the configuration pages.
Description of the displayed boxes
●Protocol Based VLAN
Enable or disable protocol-based VLAN. Other settings in "Layer 2 > VLAN".
●Subnet Based VLAN
Enable or disable subnet-based VLAN. Other settings in "Layer 2 > VLAN".
●Dynamic MAC Aging
Enable or disable the "aging" mechanism. You can configure other settings in "Layer 2 >
Dynamic MAC Aging".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
164 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Redundancy Type
The following settings are available:
–"-" (disabled)
The redundancy function is disabled.
–Spanning Tree
If you select this option, you specify the required redundancy mode in the "Redundancy
Mode" drop-down list.
–Ring
If you select this option, specify the required redundancy mode in the "Redundancy
Mode" drop-down list.
–Ring with Spanning Tree
If you select this option, the "Redundancy Mode" drop-down list is grayed out. The box
shows the current redundancy mode of the Spanning tree and the ring redundancy, for
example "MSTP/HRP Client".
You can change the current setting in the "Ring Redundancy" and "Spanning Tree"
menus.
Note
If "Ring with Spanning Tree" is enabled, the ring ports in the spanning tree are
"disabled".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 165
●Redundancy Mode
If you select "Ring" in the "Redundancy Type" drop-down list, the following options are then
available:
– -
None
– Automatic Redundancy Detection
Select this setting to configure the redundant mode automatically.
In "Automatic Redundancy Detection" mode, the
IE Switch automatically detects whether or not there is a device with
the role of "HRP Manager" in the ring. If there is, the device
adopts the role "HRP" client.
If no HRP manager is found, all devices with the "Automatic Redundancy Detection" or
"MRP
Auto Manager" setting negotiate among themselves to establish which device adopts
the
role of "MRP Manager". The device with the lowest MAC address will always become
"MRP Manager". The other devices automatically set themselves to
"MRP Client" mode.
– MRP Auto-Manager
Automatic media redundancy manager
– MRP Client
Media redundancy client
– HRP Client
High Speed Redundancy Protocol client
– HRP Manager
High Speed Redundancy Protocol manager
If you select "STP" in the "Redundancy Type" drop-down list, the following options are then
available:
–STP
Enables Spanning Tree Protocol. Typical reconfiguration times with spanning tree are
between 20 and 30 seconds. You can configure other settings in "Layer 2 > MSTP".
–RSTP
Enables Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). If a spanning tree frame is detected at
a port, this port reverts from RSTP to spanning tree. You can configure other settings
in "Layer 2 > MSTP".
Note
When using RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), loops involving duplication of
frames or frames being overtaken may occur briefly. If this is not acceptable in your
particular application, use the slower standard spanning tree mechanism.
–MSTP
Enables Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). You can configure other settings in
"Layer 2 > MSTP".
If you select "Ring with Spanning Tree" in the "Redundancy Type" drop-down list, the
current redundancy modes of the Spanning tree and ring redundancy are displayed.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
166 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Standby
Enable or disable the standby redundancy function. You will find other settings in "Layer 2
> Ring Redundancy".
●Passive Listening
Enable or disable the passive listening function.
●RMON
If you select this check box, Remote Monitoring (RMON) allows diagnostics data to be
collected on the device, prepared and read out using SNMP by a network management
station that also supports RMON. This diagnostic data, for example port-related load trends,
allow problems in the network to be detected early and eliminated. Some of the "Ethernet
statistics counters" are part of the RMON function. If you disable RMON, the "Ethernet
statistics counter" in "Information > Ethernet Statistics" is no longer updated.
●Dynamic Multicast
The following settings are possible:
–"-" (disabled)
–IGMP Snooping
Enables IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol). You can configure other settings
in "Layer 2 > Multicast > IGMP".
–GMRP
Enables GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol). You can configure other
settings in "Layer 2 > Multicast > GMRP".
Note
GMRP and IGMP cannot operate at the same time.
●GVRP
Enable or disable "GVRP" (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol). You can configure other
settings in "Layer 2 > VLAN > GVRP".
●Mirroring
Enable or disable port mirroring. You can configure other settings in "Layer 2 > Mirroring".
●Loop Detection
Enable or disable the loop detection function. This allows loops in the network to be
detected. You will find other settings in "Layer 2 > Loop Detection"
●PTP
The following settings are possible for the Precision Time Protocol:
–off
The device does not process any PTP messages. PTP messages are, however,
forwarded according to the rules of the device
–Transparent
The device adopts the function of a transparent clock and forwards PTP messages to
other nodes while at the same time making entries in the correction field of the PTP
message.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 167
5.5.2 Qos
5.5.2.1 CoS queue mapping
COS Queue Mapping
Here, CoS priorities are assigned to certain queues (Traffic Queues).
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●COS
Shows the CoS priority of the incoming packets.
●Queue
From the drop-down list, select the forwarding queue (send priority) that is assigned to the
CoS priority.
The higher the number of the queue, the higher the send priority.
Steps in configuration
1. For each value in the "COS" column, select the forwarding queue from the "Queue" drop-
down list.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
168 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.2.2 DSCP mapping
DSCP queue
On this page, DSCP settings are assigned to various queues (Traffic Queues).
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following columns:
●DSCP
Shows the DSCP priority of the incoming packets.
●Queue
From the drop-down list, select the forwarding queue (send priority) that is assigned to the
DSCP value.
The higher the queue number, the higher the send priority.
Steps in configuration
1. For each value in the "DSCP" column, select the forwarding queue from the "Queue" drop-
down list.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 169
5.5.3 Rate control
Limiting the transfer rate of incoming and outgoing data
On this page, you configure the load limitation (maximum number of data packets per second)
for the individual ports. You can specify the category of frame for which these limit values will
apply.
Description of the displayed values
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●Limit Ingress Unicast (DLF) / Limit Ingress Broadcast / Limit Ingress Multicast
Select the required setting in the drop-down list.
– enabled: Enables the function.
– disabled: Disables the function
– No Change: The setting in table 2 remains unchanged
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
170 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Total Ingress Rate pkts/s
Specify the maximum number of incoming packets processed by the device. If "No Change
is entered, the entry in the table remains unchanged.
●Egress Rate kb/s
Specify the data rate for all outgoing frames. If "No Change is entered, the entry in the table
remains unchanged
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the slot and the port to which the other information relates. This field cannot be
configured. The port is made up of the module number and the port number, for example
port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Limit Ingress Unicast (DLF)
Enable or disable the data rate for limiting incoming unicast frames with an unresolvable
address (Destination Lookup Failure).
●Limit Ingress Broadcast
Enable or disable the data rate for limiting incoming broadcast frames.
●Limit Ingress Multicast
Enable or disable the data rate for limiting incoming multicast frames.
●Total Ingress Rate pkts/s
Specify the maximum number of incoming packets processed by the device.
●Egress Rate kb/s
Specify the data rate for all outgoing frames.
Note
Rounding of the values, deviation from desired value
When you input the rate values, note that the WBM rounds to correct values.
If values are configured for Total Ingress Rate and Egress Rate, the actual values in
operation can exceed or fall below the set values by 10%.
Steps in configuration
1. Enter the relevant values in the columns "Total Ingress Rate" and "Egress Rate" in the row
of the port being configured.
2. To use the limitation for the incoming frames, select the check box in the row. For outgoing
frames, the value in the "Egress Rate" column is used.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 171
5.5.4 VLAN
5.5.4.1 General
VLAN configuration page
On this page, you define the VLAN and specify the use of the ports.
Note
Changing the Agent VLAN ID
If the configuration PC is connected directly to the device via Ethernet and you change the
agent VLAN ID, the device is no longer reachable via Ethernet following the change.
Important rules for VLANs
Make sure you keep to the following rules when configuring and operating your VLANs:
● Frames with the VLAN ID "0" are handled as untagged frames but retain their priority value.
● As default, all ports on the device send frames without a VLAN tag to ensure that the end
node can receive these frames.
● With SCALANCE X devices, the VLAN ID "1" is the default on all ports.
● If an end node is connected to a port, outgoing frames should be sent without a tag (static
access port). If, however, there is a further switch at this port, the frame should have a tag
added (trunk port).
● With a trunk port, the VLAN assignment is dynamic. Static configurations can only be
created if, in addition to the trunk port property, the port is also entered statically as a
member in the VLANs involved. An example of a static configuration is the assignment of
the multicast groups in certain VLANs.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
172 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●"VLAN ID" input box
Enter the VLAN ID in the input box.
Range of values: 1 ... 4094
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can only be assigned
once when creating a new data record and can then no longer be changed. To make a
change, the entire data record must be deleted and created again. Up to 257 VLANs can
be defined.
●Name
Enter a name for the VLAN. The name only provides information and has no effect on the
configuration. The length is a maximum of 32 characters.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 173
●Status
Shows the status type of the entry in the port filter table. Here, static means that the address
was entered as a static address by the user. The entry GVRP means that the configuration
was registered by a GVRP frame. This is, however, only possible if GVRP was enabled for
the device.
●List of ports
Specify the use of the port. The following options are available:
– "-"
The port is not a member of the VLAN.
With a new definition, all ports have the identifier "-".
– M
The port is a member of the VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded with the
corresponding VLAN tag.
– R
The port is a member of the VLAN. A GVRP frame is used for the registration.
– U (uppercase)
The port is an untagged member of the VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded
without the VLAN tag. Frames without a VLAN tag are sent from this port.
– u (lowercase)
The port is an untagged member of the VLAN, but the VLAN is not configured as a port
VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded without the VLAN tag.
– F
The port is not a member of the specified VLAN and it is not possible for the VLAN to
be registered dynamically at this port using GVRP. If a port in a VLAN has this option,
it cannot become a member of this VLAN even if it is configured as a trunk port.
You can configure further settings in "Layer 2 > VLAN > Port Based VLAN".
– T
This option is only displayed and cannot be selected in the WBM.
This port is a trunk port making it a member in all VLANs.
You configure this function in the CLI (Command Line Interface) using the
"switchport mode trunk" command.
Steps in configuration
1. Enter an ID in the "VLAN ID" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table. As default, the boxes have
"-" entered.
3. Enter a name for the VLAN under Name.
4. Specify the use of the port in the VLAN. If, for example you select M, the port is a member
of the VLAN. The frame sent in this VLAN is forwarded with the corresponding VLAN tag.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
174 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.4.2 GVRP
Configuration of GVRP functionality
Using GVRP frame, a different device can register at the port of the device for a specific VID.
A different device, can, for example be an end device or a switch. The device can also send
GVRP frames via this port.
On this page, you can enable each port for GVRP functionality.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following box:
●"GVRP" check box
Enable or disable the GVRP function.
Table 1 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 175
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Enables the sending of GVRP frames.
– disabled
Disables the sending of GVRP frames.
– No Change
No change in table 2.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the available ports. The port is made up of the module number and the port number,
for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Setting
Enable or disable the sending GVRP frames.
Steps in configuration
1. Click "GVRP" check box.
2. Click the check box after the port in the "Setting" column to enable or disable GVRP for this
port.
Repeat this for every port for which you want to enable or disable the function.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
176 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.4.3 Port-based VLAN
Processing received frames
On this page, you specify the configuration of the port properties for receiving frames.
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●Priority / Port VID / Acceptable Frames / Ingress Filtering
Select the setting in the drop-down list. If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2
remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 177
●Port
Shows the available ports and link aggregations. The port is made up of the module number
and the port number, for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Priority
From the drop-down list, select the priority given to untagged frames.
The CoS priority (Class of Service) used in the VLAN tag. If a frame is received without a
tag, it will be assigned this priority. This priority specifies how the frame is further processed
compared with other frames.
There are a total of eight priorities with values 0 to 7, where 7 represents the highest priority
(IEEE 802.1p Port Priority).
●Port VID
Select the VLAN ID from the drop-down list. Only VLAN IDs defined on the "VLAN >
General" page can be selected.
If a received frame does not have a VLAN tag, it has a tag with the VLAN ID specified here
added to it and is sent according to the rules at the port.
●Acceptable Frames
Specify which types of frames will be accepted. The following alternatives are possible:
– Tagged Frames Only
The device discards all untagged frames. Otherwise, the forwarding rules apply
according to the configuration.
– All
The device forwards all frames.
●Ingress Filtering
Specify whether the VID of received frames is evaluated
You have the following options:
– Enabled
The VLAN ID of received frames decides whether they are forwarded: To forward a
VLAN tagged frame, the receiving port must be a member in the same VLAN. Frames
from unknown VLANs are discarded at the receiving port.
– Disabled
All frames are forwarded.
Steps in configuration
1. In the row of the port to be configured, click on the relevant cell in the table to configure it.
2. Enter the values to be set in the input boxes as follows.
3. Select the values to be set from the drop-down lists.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
178 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.4.4 Protocol Based VLAN Group
Introduction
On this page, you specify groups and assign a protocol to them.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Protocol Based VLAN
Enable or disable the protocol-based VLAN assignment.
●Protocol Value
Enter the hexadecimal protocol value.
A few examples are shown below:
– PROFINET: 88:92
– IP: 08:00
– Novell: 81:37
– netbios: f0:f0
– appletalk: 80:9b
●Group Identifier
Enter the ID of the group.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Protocol Value
Shows the protocol value.
●Group Identifier
Shows the group ID.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 179
Steps in configuration
Adding an entry
1. Enter the protocol value in the "Protocol Value" input box.
2. Enter the ID for the group in the Group Identifier input box.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting an entry
1. On the "Protocol Based VLAN Port" tab check that the protocol group is not used at any
port.
2. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
3. Click the "Delete" button.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.4.5 Protocol Based VLAN Port
Introduction
On this page, you specify which protocol and which VLAN is assigned to the individual port.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Port
Select the port in the drop-down list. All available ports and the link aggregations can be
selected.
●Group Identifier
Select the group ID in the drop-down list. You specify the ID the WBM page "Protocol Based
VLAN Group".
The table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
180 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Port
All available ports and the link aggregations are shown.
●Group Identifier
Shows the group ID assigned to the port.
●VLAN ID
From the drop-down list, select the VLAN ID you want to assign to the port.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the port from the "Port" drop-down list.
2. Select the group ID from the "Group Identifier" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Specify the VLAN ID in " VLAN ID".
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.4.6 lpv4 Subnet Based VLAN
Introduction
On this page, you specify which VLAN ID is assigned to the subnet.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 181
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Subnet Based VLAN
Enable or disable the subnet-based VLAN assignment.
●Port
Select the port in the drop-down list. All available ports and the link aggregations can be
selected.
●Subnet Address
Enter the IP address of the subnet.
Example: 192.168.10.0 for the network 192.168.10.x with nodes 192.168.10.1 to
192.168.10.254.
●Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Port
All available ports and the link aggregations are shown.
●Subnet Address
Shows the IP address of the port.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet assigned to the port.
●VLAN ID
Select the VLAN ID you want to assign to the port or the subnet.
Steps in configuration
1. Select a port from the "Port" drop-down list.
2. In "Subnet", enter the subnet mask.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Select the VLAN ID from the VLAN ID drop-down list.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.5 Mirroring
Mirroring
The device provides the option of simultaneously channeling incoming or outgoing data
streams via other interfaces for analysis or monitoring. This has no effect on the monitored
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
182 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
data streams. This procedure is known as mirroring. In this menu section, you enable or disable
mirroring and set the parameters.
Mirroring ports
Mirroring a port means that the data traffic at a port (mirrored port) of the IE switch is copied
to another port (monitor port). You can mirror one or more ports to a monitor port.
If a protocol analyzer is connected to the monitor port, the data traffic at the mirrored port can
be recorded without interrupting the connection. This means that the data traffic can be
investigated without being affected. This is possible only if a free port is available on the device
as the monitor port.
5.5.5.1 General
Mirroring General
On this page, you can enable or disable the mirroring function and make the basic settings.
Note
If the maximum data rate of the mirrored port is higher than that of the monitor port, data may
be lost and the monitor port no longer reflects the data traffic at the mirrored port. Several
ports can be mirrored to one monitor port at the same time.
Mirroring a port does not work beyond switch core boundaries.
Disable port mirroring if you want to connect a normal end device to the monitor port.
Settings
The page contains the following boxes:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 183
●Mirroring
Click this check box to enable or disable mirroring
●Monitor Barrier
Click this check box to enable or disable Monitor Barrier
Note
Effects of monitor barrier
If you enable this option, management of the switch via the monitor port is no longer
reachable. The following port-specific functions are changed:
● DCP forwarding is turned off
● LLDP is turned off
● Unicast, multicast and broadcast blocking is turned on
The previous statuses of these functions are no longer restored after disabling monitor
barrier again. They are reset to the default values and may need to be reconfigured.
You can reconfigure these functions manually even if monitor barrier is turned on. The
data traffic on the monitor port is also allowed again. If you do not require this, make sure
that only the data traffic you want to monitor is forwarded to the interface.
If mirroring is disabled, the listed port-specific functions are reset to the default values.
This reset takes place regardless of whether the functions were configured manually or
automatically by enabling monitor barrier.
The table for the basic settings contains the following boxes:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Session ID
The Session ID is assigned automatically when a new entry is created.
●Session Type
Select the required entry from the drop-down list:
– -
None
– Port Based
Port based
– VLAN
VLAN-based mirroring
– MAC ACL
Mirroring of the MAC Access Control List
– IP ACL
Mirroring of the IP Access Control List
●Status
Shows whether or not mirroring is enabled.
●Dest. Port
From the drop-down list, select the output port to which data will be mirrored in this session.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
184 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Procedure
1. Click the "Create" button to create a further entry in the table.
The session ID is assigned automatically. Depending on the session type selected, you
can create one or more mirroring sessions.
2. Select the settings.
3. Click the "Set Values" button to save and activate the selected settings.
4. Change to the following tabs to make further detailed settings for the relevant session ID.
5. Click the check box in the first column to select the row.
Click the "Delete" button to delete the selected rows.
5.5.5.2 Port
Mirroring ports
You can only configure the settings on this page if you have already generated a session ID
with the session type "Port Based" on the "General" tab.
Description of the displayed boxes
●"Session ID"
Select the session you want to monitor.
●"Ingress Mirroring"
Enable or disable listening in on incoming packets at the required port.
●"Egress Mirroring"
Enable or disable listening in on outgoing packets at the required port.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 185
Steps in configuration
1. In the "Session ID" drop-down list, select the session you created earlier on the General
tab.
2. In the table, click the check box of the row after the port to be mirrored.
Select whether you want to monitor incoming or outgoing packets.
To monitor the entire data traffic of the port, select both check boxes.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.5.3 VLAN
VLAN sources of the port mirroring
You can only configure the settings on this page if you have already generated a session ID
with the session type "VLAN" on the "General" tab.
On this page, you specify the VLAN whose incoming data traffic will be mirrored to the monitor
port.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Session ID
Select the session ID. Range of values 1 to 20.
●VLAN ID
Enter the VLAN ID in the "VLAN ID" input box.
Range of values: 1 ... 4094
The "Ingress Mirroring" table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
186 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID for which the incoming frames are mirrored. The VLAN ID (a number
between 1 and 4094) can only be assigned once when creating a new data record and can
then no longer be changed. To make a change, the entire data record must be deleted and
created again. Up to 257 VLANs can be defined.
5.5.5.4 MAC Flow
ACL filter for port mirroring
You can only configure the settings on this page if you have already generated a session ID
with the session type "MAC ACL" on the "General" tab.
The ACL filter decides which data is available at the monitor port. The Ingress Monitoring and
Egress Monitoring boxes decide whether incoming or also outgoing frames are available at
the monitor port.
Description of the displayed boxes
●Session ID
Select the session number of the port mirroring. Range of values 1 to 20.
●ACL Filter Number
Shows the number of the ACL filter.
●Ingress Mirroring
Shows whether incoming packets are mirrored.
Note
Rules
A rule selected for ingress mirroring only becomes active if it was configured as a port
ingress rule on at least one port. See section "Port Ingress Rules (Page 285)"
●Source MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the sender.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 187
●Dest. MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the recipient.
●Ingress Ports
Shows a list of all ports to which this rule applies. The incoming data streams of the ports
are mirrored to the monitor port (Dest. Port).
●Egress Ports
Shows a list of all ports to which this rule applies. The outgoing data streams of the ports
are mirrored to the monitor port (Dest. Port).
5.5.5.5 IP Flow
ACL filter for port mirroring
You can only configure the settings on this page if you have already generated a session ID
with the session type "IP ACL" on the "General" tab.
The ACL filter decides which data is available at the monitor port.
In this list, IP data is output at the monitor port.
Description of the displayed boxes
●Session ID
Select the session number of the port mirroring. Range of values 1 to 20.
●ACL Filter Number
Shows the number of the ACL filter.
●Ingress Mirroring
Shows whether incoming packets are mirrored.
Note
Rules
A rule selected for ingress mirroring only becomes active if it was configured as a port
ingress rule on at least one port. See section "Port Ingress Rules (Page 291)"
●Source IP Address
Shows the IP address of the sender.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
188 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Source Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask of the sender.
●Dest. IP Address
Shows the IP address of the recipient.
●Dest. Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask of the recipient.
●Ingress Ports
Shows a list of all ports to which this rule applies. The incoming data streams of the ports
are mirrored to the monitor port (Dest. Port).
●Egress Ports
Shows a list of all ports to which this rule applies. The outgoing data streams of the ports
are mirrored to the monitor port (Dest. Port).
5.5.6 Dynamic MAC aging
Protocol settings and switch functionality
The device automatically learns the source addresses of the connected nodes. This
information is used to forward data frames to the nodes specifically involved. This reduces the
network load for the other nodes.
If a device does not receive a frame whose source address matches a learnt address within
a certain time, it deletes the learnt address. This mechanism is known as "Aging". Aging
prevents frames being forwarded incorrectly, for example when an end device (for example a
programming device) is connected to a different switch port.
If the check box is not enabled, a device does not delete learnt addresses automatically.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Dynamic MAC Aging
Enable or disable the function for automatic aging of learned MAC addresses:
●Aging Time [s]
Enter the time in seconds. After this time, a learned address is deleted if the device does
not receive any further frames from this sender address. The range of values is from 10
seconds to 630 seconds
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 189
Steps in configuration
1. Select the "Dynamic MAC Aging" check box.
2. Enter the time in seconds in the "Aging Time [s]" input box.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.7 Ring redundancy
5.5.7.1 Ring redundancy
Rules for ring redundancy
Factory settings
● The factory setting defines MSTP as the redundancy method.
● With SCALANCE XM-400, the factory setting defines ports P1.1 and P1.2 as ring ports.
● With SCALANCE XM-500, the factory setting defines ports P0.1 and P0.2 as ring ports.
Ring ports
The predefined ring ports of SCALANCE XR-500 are 10 Gbps ports.
If a 1000 Mbps SFP transceiver is plugged into one of the 10 Gbps ring ports, you cannot
enable ring redundancy.
Remove the 1000 Mbps SFP transceiver.
Enabling redundancy
You can enable ring redundancy as follows:
● using the WBM
● using the CLI
● using the SELECT/SET button
● using a PNIO configuration download
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
190 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Configuration of ring redundancy
●Ring Redundancy
If you enable the "Ring Redundancy" check box, you turn ring redundancy on. The ring
ports set on this page are used.
●Ring Redundancy Mode
Here, you set the mode of the ring redundancy.
The following modes are available:
– Automatic Redundancy Detection
Select this setting to create an automatic configuration of the redundancy mode.
In the "Automatic Redundancy Detection" mode, the device automatically detects
whether or not there is a device with the "HRP Manager" role in the ring. If there is, the
device adopts the role "HRP" client.
If no HRP manager is found, all devices with the "Automatic Redundancy Detection" or
"MRP Auto Manager" setting negotiate among themselves to establish which device
adopts the role of "MRP Manager". The device with the lowest MAC address will always
become "MRP Manager". The other devices automatically set themselves to "MRP
Client" mode.
– MRP Auto-Manager
Automatic media redundancy manager
– MRP Client
Media redundancy client
– HRP Client
High Speed Redundancy Protocol client
– HRP Manager
High Speed Redundancy Protocol manager
●Ring Ports
Here, you set the ports to be used as ring ports in ring redundancy.
The ring port you select in the left-hand drop-down menu is the "Isolated Port" in HRP.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 191
●Observer
Enable or disable the observer. The "Observer" function is only available in HRP rings.
The ring port selected in the left-hand drop-down menu is connected to the "isolated port"
of an HRP manager.
The observer monitors malfunctions of the redundancy manager or incorrect configurations
of an HRP ring.
If the observer is enabled, it can interrupt the connected ring if errors are detected. To do
this, the observer switches a ring port to the "blocking" status. When the error is resolved,
the observer enables the port again.
●Restart Observer
If numerous errors occur in quick succession, the observer no longer enables its port
automatically. The ring port remains permanently in the "blocking" status. This is signaled
by the error LED and a message text.
After the errors have been eliminated, you can enable the port again using the "Restart
Observer" button.
Restoring factory settings
If you have restored the factory defaults, ring redundancy is disabled and the default ports are
used as the ring ports. This can lead to circulating frames and failure of the data traffic if other
settings were used in a previous configuration.
Changing over the status of the ring ports with the redundancy manager
If you configure a redundancy manager, set the status of the ring ports. The first ring port
changes to the "blocking" status and the second ring port to the "forwarding" status. As long
as ring redundancy is enabled, you cannot change the status of these ring ports.
Note
Make sure that you first open the ring so that there are no circulating frames.
5.5.7.2 Standby
Redundant linking of rings
Standby redundancy allows the redundant linking of several HRP rings.
You can establish several standby connections. If a standby master section fails, all standby
connections fail over.
To establish a standby connection, configure two neighboring devices within a ring as standby
master or standby slave. The standby master and the standby slave must be connected via
parallel cables to two devices in another ring.
In problem-free operation, messages are exchanged between the two rings via the master. If
the master's line is disturbed, the slave takes over the forwarding of messages between the
two rings.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
192 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Enable standby redundancy for both standby partners and select the ports via which the device
is connected to the rings you want to link to.
For the "Standby Connection Name", a name unique within the ring must be assigned for both
partners. This identifies the two devices as standby partners that belong together.
Note
To be able to use the function, HRP must be activated.
The standby manager always requires an activated HRP client.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 193
Description of the displayed boxes
●Standby
Click the check box to enable or disable the function.
●Standby Port
Select which ports are standby ports. The linking to other rings is via standby ports.
The standby port is involved in the redirection of data traffic. In there are no problems, only
the standby port of the master is enabled and handles the data traffic into the connected
HRP ring or HRP bus.
If the master or the Ethernet connection (link) of one of the standby ports of the master
fails, the standby port of the master will be disabled and the standby port of the slave
enabled. As a result, a functioning Ethernet connection to the connected network segment
(HRP ring or HRP linear bus) is restored.
Note
Linking several rings
If you link several rings; in other words, when more than one port is enabled as a standby
port, the standby master and the standby slave can only have one Ethernet connection
to one ring. Otherwise circulating frames will result and lead to a loss of data traffic.
●Standby Connection Name
This name defines the master/slave device pair. Both devices must be located in the same
ring.
Here, enter the name for the standby connection. This must be identical to the name entered
on the standby partner. You can select any name to suit your purposes, however, you can
only use the name for one pair of devices in the entire network.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
194 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Force device to Standby Master
If you select this check box, the device is configured as a standby master regardless of its
MAC address.
– If this check box is not selected for either of the devices for which the standby master
is enabled, then assuming that no error has occurred, the device with the higher MAC
address adopts the role of standby master.
– If the option is selected for both devices or if the "Force device to Standby Master"
property is supported by only one device, the standby master is also selected based on
the MAC address.
This type of assignment is important in particular when a device is replaced. Depending on
the MAC addresses, the previous device with the slave function can take over the role of
the standby master.
Note
If two devices are linked by the standby function, the "Standby" function must be enabled
on both devices.
●Wait for Standby Partner
– Enabled
A standby connection is enabled only after the standby master and the standby slave
as well as their standby partners have established a connection. This ensures that the
redundant connection is really available before communication via a standby connection
is enabled.
– Disabled
A standby connection is enabled even if the standby master has not yet established a
connection to the standby slave.
5.5.8 Spanning tree
5.5.8.1 General
General settings of MSTP
This is the basic page for spanning tree. Select the compatibility mode from the drop-down
list. As default, Multiple Spanning Tree is enabled.
On the configuration pages of these functions, you can make further settings.
Depending on the compatibility mode, you can configure the corresponding function on the
relevant configuration page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 195
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Spanning Tree
Enable or disable Spanning Tree.
●Protocol Compatibility
Select the compatibility mode of MSTP, for example if you select RSTP, MSTP behaves
like RSTP.
The following settings are available:
– STP
– RSTP
– MSTP
Steps in configuration
1. Select the "MSTP" check box.
2. From the "Protocol Compatibility" drop-down list, select the type of compatibility.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.8.2 CIST general
MSTP-CIST configuration
The page consists of the following parts.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
196 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
● The left-hand side of the page shows the configuration of the device.
● The central part shows the configuration of the root bridge that can be derived from the
spanning tree frames received by an device.
● The right-hand side shows the configuration of the regional root bridge that can be derived
from the MSTP frames received by an device. The displayed data is only visible if you have
enabled "MSTP" on the "General" page and when "MSTP" is set for "Protocol Compatibility".
This also applies to the "Bridge Max Hop Count" parameter. If the device is a root bridge,
the information on the left and right matches.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Bridge Priority / Root Priority
The Bridge Priority specifies which device becomes the Root Bridge. The Bridge with the
highest priority becomes the Root Bridge. The lower the value, the higher the priority. If
several devices in a network have the same priority, the device whose MAC address has
the lowest numeric value will become the root bridge. Both parameters, bridge priority and
MAC address together form the Bridge identifier. Since the root bridge manages all path
changes, it should be located as centrally as possible due to the delay of the frames. The
value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of 4096 with a range of values from 0 through
61440.
●Bridge Address / Root Address
The bridge address shows the MAC address of the device and the root address shows the
MAC address of the root bridge.
●Root Port
Shows the port over which the switch communicates with the root bridge.
●Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 197
●Topology Changes / Last Topology Change
The entry for the device shows the number of reconfiguration actions due to the spanning
tree mechanism since the last startup. For the root bridge, the time since the last
reconfiguration is displayed as follows:
– Seconds: sec unit after the number
– Minutes: min unit after the number
– Hour: hr unit after the number
●Bridge hello time [s] / Root hello time [s]
Each bridge sends configuration frames (BPDUs) regularly. The interval between two such
frames is the Hello time. The default for this parameter is 2 seconds.
●Bridge forward delay[s] / Root Forward Delay [s]
New configuration data is not used immediately by a bridge but only after the period
specified in the parameter. This ensures that operation is only started with the new topology
after all the bridges have the required information. The default for this parameter is 15
seconds.
●Bridge Max Age / Root Max Age
Bridge Max Age defines the maximum "age" of a received BPDU for it to be accepted as
valid by the switch. The default for this parameter is 20.
●Regional Root Priority
For a description, see Bridge Priority / Root Priority
●Regional Root Address
The MAC address of the device.
●Regional Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.
●Bridge Max Hop Count
This parameter specifies how many MSTP nodes a BPDU may pass through. If an MSTP
BPDU is received and has a hop count that exceeds the value configured here, it is
discarded. The default for this parameter is 20.
●Reset Counters
Click this button to reset the counters on this page.
●Region Name
Enter the name of the MSTP region to which this device belongs. As default, the MAC
address of the device is entered here. This value must be the same on all devices that
belong to the same MSTP region.
●Region Version
Enter the version number of the MSTP region in which the device is located. This value
must be the same on all devices that belong to the same MSTP region
Steps in configuration
1. Enter the data required for the configuration in the input boxes.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
198 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.8.3 CIST port
MSTP-CIST port configuration
When the page is called, the table displays the current status of the configuration of the port
parameters.
To configure them, click the relevant cells in the port table.
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Spanning Tree Status
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Port is integrated in the spanning tree.
– disabled
Port is not integrated in the spanning tree.
– No Change
Table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 199
●Port
Shows the available ports. The port is made up of the module number and the port number,
for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Spanning Tree Status
Specify whether or not the port is integrated in the spanning tree.
Note
If you disable the "Spanning Tree Status" option for a port, this may cause the formation
of loops. The topology must be kept in mind.
●Priority
Enter the priority of the port. The priority is only evaluated when the path costs are the same.
The value must be divisible by 16. If the value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is
automatically adapted.
Range of values: 0 - 240.
The default is 128.
●Cost Calc
Enter the path cost calculation. If you enter the value "0", the automatically calculated value
is displayed in the "Path Cost" box.
●Path Cost
This parameter is used to calculate the path that will be selected. The path with the lowest
value is selected as the path. If several ports of a device have the same value for the path
costs, the port with the lowest port number is selected.
If the value in the "Cost Calc" field is "0", the automatically calculated value is displayed.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc" field is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher
the achievable transmission speed is, the lower the value of the path costs.
Typical values for path costs with rapid spanning tree:
– 10,000 Mbps = 2,000
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
The values can, however, also be set individually.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
200 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Status
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed and cannot be
configured. The "Status" parameter depends on the configured protocol. The following is
possible for status:
–
Disabled
The port only receives and is not involved in STP, MSTP and RSTP.
– Discarding
In the "Discarding" mode, BPDU frames are received. Other incoming or outgoing
frames are discarded.
– Listening
In this status, BPDUs are both received and sent. The port is involved in the spanning
tree algorithm.
–
Learning
Stage prior to the forwarding status, the port is actively learning the topology (in other
words, the node addresses).
–
Forwarding
Following the reconfiguration time, the port is active in the network; it receives and
forwards data frames.
●Fwd. Trans
Specifies the number of changes from the "Discarding" status to the "Forwarding" status.
●Edge Type
Specify the type of edge port. You have the following options:
– "-"
Edge port is disabled. The port is treated as a "no EdgePort".
– Admin
Select this option when there is always an end device on this port. Otherwise a
reconfiguration of the network will be triggered each time a connection is changed.
– Auto
Select this option if you want a connected end device to be detected automatically at
this port. When the connection is established the first time, the port is treated as a "no
Edge Port".
– Admin/Auto
Select these options if you operate a combination of both on this port. When the
connection is established the first time, the port is treated as an Edge Port.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 201
●Edge
Shows the status of the port.
– Enabled
An end device is connected to this port.
– Disabled
There is a Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree device at this port.
With an end device, a switch can change over the port faster without taking into account
spanning tree frames. If a spanning tree frame is received despite this setting, the port
automatically changes to the "Disabled" setting for switches.
●P.t.P. Type
Select the required option from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the port that
is set.
– "-"
Point to point is calculated automatically. If the port is set to half duplex, a point-to-point
link is not assumed.
– P.t.P.
Even with half duplex, a point-to-point link is assumed.
–
Shared Media
Even with a full duplex connection, a point-to-point link is not assumed.
Note
Point-to-point connection means a direct connection between two devices. A shared
media connection is, for example, a connection to a hub.
●Hello Time
Enter the interval after which the bridge sends configuration BPDUs. As default, 2 seconds
is set.
Range of values: 1-2 seconds
Note
The port-specific setting of the Hello time is only possible in MSTP compatible mode.
Steps in configuration
1. In the input cells of the table row, enter the values of the port you are configuring.
2. From the drop-down lists of the cells of the table row, select the values of the port you are
configuring.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
202 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.8.4 MST general
Multiple Spanning Tree configuration
With MSTP, in addition to RSTP, several VLANs can be managed in a LAN with separate
RSTP trees.
Description
The page contains the following box:
●MSTP Instance ID
Enter the number of the MSTP instance.
Permitted values: 0 - 64
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●MSTP Instance ID
Shows the number of the MSTP instance.
●Root Address
Shows the MAC address of the root bridge
●Root Priority
Shows the priority of the root bridge.
●Bridge Priority
Enter the bridge priority in this box. The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of
4096 with a range of values from 0 to 61440.
●VLAN ID
Enter the VLAN ID. Here, you can also specify ranges with Start ID, "-", End ID. Several
ranges or IDs are separated by ",".
Permitted values: 1- 4094
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 203
Procedure
Creating a new entry
1. Enter the number of the MSTP instance in the "MSTP Instance ID" box.
2. Click the "Create" button.
3. Enter the identifier of the virtual LAN in the "VLAN ID" input box.
4. Enter the priority of the bridge in the "Bridge Priority" input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting entries
1. Use the check box at the beginning of the relevant row to select the entries to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button to delete the selected entries from memory. The entries are deleted
from the memory of the device and the display on this page is updated.
5.5.8.5 MST port
Configuration of the Multiple Spanning Tree port parameters
On this page, you set the parameters for the ports of the configured multiple spanning tree
instances.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following box:
● Drop-down list "MSTP Instance ID"
In the drop-down list, select the ID of the MSTP instance.
Table 1 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
204 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●MSTP Status
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
– disabled
– No Change: Table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows all available ports and link aggregations.
●MSTP Instance ID
ID of the MSTP instance.
●MSTP Status
Click the check box to enable or disable this option.
●Priority
Enter the priority of the port. The priority is only evaluated when the path costs are the same.
The value must be divisible by 16. If the value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is
automatically adapted.
Range of values: 0 - 240.
The default is 128.
●Cost Calc
Enter the path cost calculation in the input box. If you enter the value "0" here, the
automatically calculated value is displayed in the next box "Path Cost".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 205
●Path Cost
The path costs from this port to the root bridge. The path with the lowest value is selected
as the path. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with the lowest port
number is selected.
If the value in the "Cost Calc" field is "0", the automatically calculated value is displayed.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc" field is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher
the achievable transmission rate, the lower the value for the path costs will be.
Typical values for rapid spanning tree are as follows:
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
The values can, however, also be set individually.
●State
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed and cannot be
configured. The following is possible for status:
–Discarding
The port exchanges MSTP information but is not involved in the data traffic.
–Blocked
In the blocking mode, BPDU frames are received.
–Forwarding
The port receives and sends data frames.
Steps in configuration
1. In the input cells of the table row, enter the values of the port you are configuring.
2. From the drop-down lists of the cells of the table row, select the values of the port you are
configuring.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
206 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.8.6 Enhanced Passive Listening Compatibility
Enabling the function
On this page, you can enable passive listening compatibility.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●"Enhanced Passive Listening Compatibility" check box
Enable or disable this function for the entire device.
●Setting drop-down list
– enabled
Enable the function for all ports of the device
– disabled
Disable the function for all ports of the device
– No Change
No Change
●"Copy to Table" button
Writes the setting made in "Setting" to the following table
Port-specific table:
If the function is enabled for the entire device, enable or disable this function on individual ports.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 207
●Port
Displays the port of the device.
●"Setting" check box
Enable or disable the function for this port
Steps in configuration
Enable the function for the entire device
1. Enable or disable "Enhanced Passive Listening Compatibility"
2. Click the "Set Values" button
For all ports of the device:
1. From the drop-down list, select whether the function should be enabled or disabled or
adopted unchanged.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
For individual ports of the device:
1. Click the check box after the required port in the port table to enable or disable the function.
2. Click the "Set Values" button
5.5.9 Loop Detection
With the "Loop detection" function, you specify the ports for which loop detection will be
activated. The ports involved send special test frames - the loop detection frames. If these
frames are sent back to the device, there is a loop.
A "Local loop" involving this device means that the frames are received again at a different
port of the same device. If the sent frames are received again at the same port, there is a
"remote loop" involving other network components.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
208 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Note
A loop is an error in the network structure that needs to be eliminated. The loop detection
can help to find the errors more quickly but does not eliminate them. The loop detection is
not suitable for increasing network availability by deliberately including loops.
Note
Note that loop detection is only possible at ports that were not configured as ring ports or
standby ports.
Description
●"Loop detection" option button
Enable or disable the loop detection.
●"VLAN loop detection" option button
Enable or disable the VLAN loop detection.
Table 1 contains the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2
●Threshold Value / Remote Reaction / Local Reaction
Make the required settings.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2
Table 2 contains the following columns:
●Port
Shows the available ports.
●Setting
Specify how the port handles loop detection frames. Select one of the following options
from the drop-down list:
Note
Test frames create additional network load. We recommend that you only configure
individual switches, for example at branch points of the ring, as "Sender" and the others
as "Forwarder".
– Sender
Loop detection frames are sent out and forwarded.
– Forwarder
Loop detection frames from other devices are forwarded.
– blocked
The forwarding of loop detection frames is blocked.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 209
●Threshold
By entering a number, specify the number of received loop detection frames as of which a
loop is assumed.
●Remote reaction
Specify how the port will react if a remote loop occurs. Select one of the two options from
the drop-down list:
– No action: A loop has no effect on the port.
– Disable: The port is blocked.
●Local reaction
Specify how the port will react if a local loop occurs. Select one of the two options from the
drop-down list:
– No action: A loop has no effect on the port.
– Disable: The port is blocked
●Status
This box shows whether loop detection is enabled or disabled for this port.
●Source port
Shows the output port of the loop detection frame that triggered the last reaction.
●Source VLAN
This box shows the VLAN-ID of the loop detection frame that triggered the last reaction.
This is only possible if "VLAN Support Enabled" was selected earlier on the "Loop Detection
Configuration" page.
●Reset
After a loop in the network has been eliminated, click this button "Reset counters to reset
the port again.
5.5.10 Link aggregation
Bundling network connections for redundancy and higher bandwidth
Link aggregations according to IEEE 802.3ad allow several connections between neighboring
devices to be bundled to achieve higher bandwidths and protection against failure.
Ports on both partner devices are included in link aggregations and the devices are then
connected via these ports. To assign ports (in other words links) correctly to a partner device,
the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) from the IEEE 802.3ad standard is used.
Up to 8 link aggregations can be defined. A maximum of 8 ports can be assigned to each link
aggregation.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
210 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Display of the configured aggregation
The menu displays all the configured link aggregations.
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Port
Shows the virtual port number of this link aggregation. This identifier is assigned internally
by the firmware.
●Link Aggregation Name
Shows the name of the link aggregation. This name can be specified by the user during
configuration. The name is not absolutely necessary but can be useful to distinguish
between the various link aggregations.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address.
●Status
Enable or disable link aggregation.
●MTU
Specify the packet size.
●LACP
– On
Enables the sending of LACP frames.
– Off
Disables the sending of LACP frames.
●Frame Distribution
Set the type of distribution of packets on the individual links of an aggregation.
– Destination&Source MAC
The distribution is based on a combination of the destination and source MAC address.
– Destination&Source IP MAC
The distribution is based on a combination of the destination and source IP and MAC
address.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 211
●VLAN Mode
Specify how the link aggregation is entered in a VLAN:
– Hybrid
The link aggregation sends tagged and untagged frames. It is not automatically a
member of a VLAN.
– Trunk
The link aggregation only sends tagged frames and is automatically a member of all
VLANs.
●Port
Shows the ports that belong to this link aggregation. The following values can be selected
from the drop-down list:
– "-" (disabled)
Link aggregation is disabled.
– "a" (active)
The port sends LACP frames and is only involved in the link aggregation when LACP
frames are received.
– "p" (passive)
The port is only involved in the link aggregation when LACP frames are received.
– "o" (on)
The port is involved in the link aggregation and does not send any LACP frames.
Note
Within a "link aggregation", only ports with the following configuration are possible:
● all ports with "o"
● all ports with "a" or "p".
Steps in configuration
Basics prior to configuration
1. First, identify the ports you want to put together to form a link aggregation between the
devices.
2. Configure the link aggregation on the devices.
3. Adopt the configuration for all devices.
4. Perform the last step, the cabling.
Note
If you cable aggregated links prior to configuration, it is possible that you will create loops
in the network! The network involved may deteriorate badly due to this or complete
disruption may occur.
Creating a new link aggregation
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
212 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
1. Click the "Create" button to create a new link aggregation.
This creates a new row.
2. Select the ports that will belong to this link aggregation.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting an aggregation
1. Using the check box at the beginning of a row, select the link aggregation you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
Changing an aggregation
1. In the overview, click on the relevant table entry to change the configuration of a created
link aggregation.
2. Make all the changes.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.11 DCP forwarding
Applications
The DCP protocol is used by STEP 7 and the PST Tool for configuration and diagnostics.
When shipped, DCP is enabled on all ports; in other words, DCP frames are forwarded at all
ports. With this option, you can disable the sending of these frames for individual ports, for
example to prevent individual parts of the network from being configured with the PST Tool or
to divide the full network into smaller parts for configuration and diagnostics.
Note
PNIO configuration
Since DCP is a PROFINET protocol, the configuration created here is only effective with the
VLAN associated with the TIA interface.
All the ports of the device are displayed on this page. After each displayed port, there is a drop-
down list for function selection.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 213
Description of the displayed values
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. If "No Change is selected, the entry in table 2
remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
214 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Port
Shows the available ports. The port is made up of the module number and the port number,
for example port 0.1 is module 0, port 1.
●Setting
From the drop-down list, select whether the port should block or forward outgoing DCP
frames. You have the following options available:
–Forward
DCP frames are forwarded via this port.
–Block
No outgoing DCP frames are forwarded via this port. It is nevertheless still possible to
receive via this port.
Steps in configuration
1. From the options in the drop-down list in the row, select which ports should support sending
DCP frames.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.12 LLDP
Identifying the network topology
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is defined in the IEEE 802.AB standard.
LLDP is a method used to discover the network topology. Network components exchange
information with their neighbor devices using LLDP.
Network components that support LLDP have an LLDP agent. The LLDP agent sends
information about itself and receives information from connected devices at periodic intervals.
The received information is stored in the MIB.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 215
Applications
PROFINET uses LLDP for topology diagnostics. In the default setting, LLDP is enabled for all
ports; in other words, LLDP frames are sent and received on all ports. With this function, you
have the option of enabling or disabling sending and/or receiving per port.
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2
remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
216 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Port
Shows the port.
●Setting
From the drop-down list, select whether or not the port will send or receive LLDP frames.
You have the following options available:
– Rx
This port can only receive LLDP frames.
– Tx
This port can only send LLDP frames.
– Rx & Tx
This port can receive and send LLDP frames.
– "-" (disabled)
This port can neither receive nor send LLDP frames.
Steps in configuration
1. From the drop-down list in the row of the port you want to configure, select the LLDP
functionality.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.13 Unicast
5.5.13.1 Filtering
Address filtering
This table shows the source addresses of unicast address frames entered statically by the
user during parameter assignment.
On this page, you also define the static unicast filters.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 217
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●VLAN ID
Select the VLAN ID in which you configure a new static MAC address. If nothing is set,
"VLAN1" is set as the basic setting.
●MAC Address
Enter the MAC address here.
This table contains the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN-ID assigned to this MAC address.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the node that the device has learned or the user has configured.
●Status
Shows the status of each address entry:
– Static
Configured by the user. Static addresses are stored permanently; in other words, they
are not deleted when the aging time expires or when the switch is restarted.
– Invalid
These values are not evaluated.
●Port
Shows the port via which the node with the specified address can be reached. Frames
received by the device whose destination address matches this address will be forwarded
to this port.
Note
You can only specify one port for unicast addresses.
Steps in configuration
To edit the entries, follow the steps below.
Creating a new entry
1. Select the relevant VLAN ID.
2. Enter the MAC address in the "MAC Address" input box.
3. Click the "Create" button to create a new entry in the table.
4. Select the relevant port from the drop-down list.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Changing the entry
1. Select the relevant port.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
218 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Deleting an entry
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all entries you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button to delete the selected entries from the filter table.
5.5.13.2 Locked ports
Activating the access control
On this page, you can block individual ports for unknown nodes.
If the Port Lock function is enabled, packets arriving at this port from unknown MAC addresses
are discarded immediately. Packets from known nodes are accepted by the port.
Since ports with the Port Lock function enabled cannot learn any MAC addresses, learned
addresses on these ports are automatically deleted after the Port Lock function is enabled.
The port accepts only static MAC addresses that were created previously either manually or
with the "Start Learning" function and the "Stop Learning" function.
To enter all connected nodes automatically, there is a function for automatic learning (see
"Layer 2 > Unicast > Learning").
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 219
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Enables the port lock function.
– disabled
Disables the port lock function.
– No Change
Table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
This column lists all the ports available on this device.
●Check box "Setting"
Enable or disable access control for the port.
Steps in configuration
Enabling access control for an individual port
1. Select the check box in the relevant row in table 2.
2. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Enabling access control for all ports
1. In the "Setting" drop-down list, select the "enabled" entry.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The check box is enabled for all ports in table 2.
3. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.13.3 Learning
Starting/stopping learning
With the automatic learning function, all connected devices are automatically entered in the
unicast filter table. As long as the "Start learning" function is enabled, all learned unicast
addresses are created immediately as static unicast entries.
The learning process is ended only after clicking the "Stop learning" button. With this method,
learning can take a few minutes or several hours in larger networks before all nodes have
really been learned. Only nodes that send packets during the learning phase are found.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
220 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
By subsequently enabling the Port Lock function, only packets from the nodes known after the
end of the learning phase (static unicast entries) will be accepted at the relevant ports.
Note
If the Port Lock function was already active on individual ports prior to the automatic learning
phase, no addresses will be learned on these ports. This makes it possible to restrict learning
to certain ports. To do this, first enable the Port Lock function of the ports that are not intended
to learn addresses.
Steps in configuration
Learning addresses
1. Click the "Start learning" button to start the learning phase.
After starting the learning phase, the "Start learning" button is replaced by the "Stop
learning" button.
The device now enters the addresses of connected devices until you stop the function.
2. Click the "Stop learning" button to stop the learning function.
The button is once again replaced by the "Start Learning" button. The learned entries are
stored.
Deleting all static unicast addresses
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 221
1. Click the "Clear all static unicast addresses" button to delete all static entries.
In large networks with numerous nodes, automatic learning may lead to a lot of undesired
static entries. To avoid having to delete these individually, this button can be used to delete
all static entries. This function is disabled during automatic learning.
Note
Depending on the number of entries involved, deleting may take some time.
5.5.13.4 Unicast blocking
Blocking the forwarding of unknown unicast frames
On this page, you can block the forwarding of unknown unicast frames for individual ports.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
222 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed values
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Blocking of unicast frames is enabled.
– disabled
Blocking of unicast frames is disabled.
– No Change
Table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
All available ports are listed in this column. Unavailable ports are not displayed.
●Setting
Enable or disable the blocking of unicast frames.
Note
Ring redundancy / standby
If ring redundancy or standby is enabled, the ports configured for this are not included in the
unicast blocking.
Steps in configuration
Enabling blocking for an individual port
1. Select the check box in the relevant row in table 2.
2. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Enabling blocking for all ports
1. In the "Setting" drop-down list, select the "enabled" entry.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The check box is enabled for all ports in table 2.
3. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 223
5.5.14 Multicast
5.5.14.1 Groups
Multicast applications
In the majority of cases, a frame is sent with a unicast address to a particular recipient. If an
application sends the same data to several recipients, the amount of data can be reduced by
sending the data using one multicast address. For some applications, there are fixed multicast
addresses (NTP, IETF1 Audio, IETF1 Video etc.).
Reducing network load
In contrast to unicast frames, multicast frames represent a higher load for the device.
Generally, multicast frames are sent to all ports. There are three ways of reducing the load
caused by multicast frames:
● Static entry of the addresses in the multicast filter table.
● Dynamic entry of the addresses by listening in on IGMP parameter assignment frames
(IGMP Configuration).
● Active dynamic assignment of addresses by GMRP frames.
The result of all these methods is that multicast frames are sent only to ports for which an
appropriate address is entered.
The "Multicast" menu item, shows the multicast frames currently entered in the filter table and
their destination ports that the user set in the parameters.
Configuring multicast addresses
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
224 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●VLAN ID
If you click on this text box, a drop-down list is displayed. Here you can select the VLAN ID
of a new MAC address you want to configure.
●MAC Address
Here you enter a new MAC multicast address you want to configure.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●VLAN ID
Here, the VLAN ID of the VLAN is displayed to which the MAC multicast address of this
row is assigned.
●MAC Address
Here, the multicast address is displayed that the device has learned or the user has
configured.
●Status - Static
Shows the status of each address entry. The address was entered statically by the user.
Static addresses are stored permanently; in other words, they are not deleted when the
aging time expires or when the device is restarted. These must be deleted by the user.
●Port List
There is a column for each slot. Within a column, the multicast group to which the port
belongs is shown. The drop-down list provides the following options:
– M
(Member) Multicast frames are sent via this port.
– F
(Forbidden) Not a member of the multicast group. This address must also not be an
address learned dynamically with GMRP or IGMP.
– –
Not a member of the multicast group. No multicast frames with the defined multicast
MAC address are sent via this port.
Steps in configuration
Creating a new entry
1. Specify the required ID in the "VLAN ID" text box.
2. Enter the MAC address in the "MAC Address" input box.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Assign the relevant ports to the MAC address.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting an entry
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 225
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
The row is deleted from the display and from the memory of the device.
5.5.14.2 IGMP
Function
IE switches support "IGMP snooping" and the IGMP querier function. If "IGMP snooping" is
enabled, IGMP frames are evaluated and the multicast filter table is updated with this
information. If "IGMP Querier is also enabled, IE switches also send IGMP queries that trigger
responses from IGMP-compliant nodes.
IGMP Snooping Aging Time
In this menu, you can configure the aging time for IGMP Configuration. When the time elapses,
entries created by IGMP are deleted from the address table if they are not updated by a new
IGMP frame.
This applies to all ports; a port-specific configuration is not possible.
IGMP Snooping Aging Time depending on the querier
SCALANCE XR500 as IGMP querier
If a SCALANCE XR500 is used as an IGMP querier, the query interval is 125 seconds. For
the "IGMP Snooping Aging Time", set at least 250 seconds.
Other IGMP queriers
If a different IGMP querier is used, the value of the "IGMP Snooping Aging Time" should be
at least twice as long as the query interval.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
226 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●IGMP Snooping
Enable or disable IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol). The function allows the
assignment of IP addresses to multicast groups. If the check box is selected, IGMP entries
are included in the table and IGMP frames are forwarded.
●IGMP Snooping Aging Time
In this box, enter the value for the aging time in seconds. As default, 300 seconds is set.
Valid values: 130 - 300 (seconds)
●IGMP Querier
Enable or disable "IGMP Querier". The device sends IGMP queries.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the "IGMP Snooping" check box.
2. Enter the value for the aging time in seconds in the "IGMP Snooping Aging Time" box.
3. Select the "IGMP Querier" check box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.14.3 GMRP
Activating GMRP
By selecting the check box, you specify whether or not GMRP is used for each individual port.
If "GMRP" is disabled for a port, no registrations are made for it and it cannot send GMRP
frames.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 227
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following box:
●"GMRP" check box
Enable or disable the GMRP function.
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Enables the sending of GRMP frames.
– disabled
Disables the sending of GRMP frames.
– No Change
Table 2 remains unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
This column shows all the ports available on the device as well as the link aggregations.
●Setting
With this check box, you enable or disable GMRP for each individual port or link aggregation.
Steps in configuration
Enabling the sending of GMRP frames for an individual port
1. Select the "GRMP" check box.
2. Select the check box in the relevant row in table 2.
3. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Enabling the sending of GMRP frames for all ports
1. Select the "GRMP" check box.
2. In the "Setting" drop-down list, select the "enabled" entry.
3. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The check box is enabled for all ports in table 2.
4. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
228 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.14.4 Multicast blocking
Disabling the forwarding of unknown multicast frames
On this page, you can block the forwarding of unknown multicast frames for individual ports.
Description of the displayed values
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
Blocking of multicast frames is enabled.
– disabled
Blocking of multicast frames is disabled.
– No Change
Table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
All available ports are listed in this column. Unavailable ports are not displayed.
●Setting
Enable or disable the blocking of multicast frames.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 229
Steps in configuration
Enabling blocking for an individual port
1. Select the check box in the relevant row in table 2.
2. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Enabling blocking for all ports
1. In the "Setting" drop-down list, select the "enabled" entry.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The check box is enabled for all ports in table 2.
3. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.15 Broadcast
Blocking the forwarding of broadcast frames
On this page, you can block the forwarding of broadcast frames for individual ports.
Note
Some communication protocols work only with the support of broadcast. In these cases,
blocking can lead to loss of data communication. Block broadcast only when you are sure
that you do not need it.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
230 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following setting options:
– enabled
The blocking of broadcast frames is enabled.
– disabled
The blocking of broadcast frames is disabled.
– No Change
Table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 231
●Port
All available ports and the link aggregations are shown.
●Setting
Enable or disable the blocking of broadcast frames.
Steps in configuration
Enabling the blocking of broadcast frames for an individual port
1. Select the check box in the relevant row in table 2.
2. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Enabling the blocking of broadcast frames for all ports
1. In the "Setting" drop-down list, select the "enabled" entry.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The check box is enabled for all ports in table 2.
3. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.16 PTP (SCALANCE XR-500 only)
5.5.16.1 General
IEEE 1588 with SCALANCE devices
The IEEE 1588v2 standard defines mechanisms with which highly precise time of day
synchronization of devices in a network can be achieved. SCALANCE devices with suitable
hardware support time synchronization according to IEEE 1588v2. The functionality is disabled
on these devices when they are shipped and following a "Reset to factory defaults". To be able
to use PTP, enable this function and configure every port that is on the synchronization path
as well as ports that are blocked due to redundancy mechanisms. PTP can also be used with
redundancy mechanisms in the ring such as HRP, standby linking of rings, MRP and RSTP.
The following sections describe the configuration options of Web Based Management.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
232 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
1588 Configuration
On this page, you specify how the device will process PTP messages.
1588 Mode
You can make the following settings:
●off
The device does not process any PTP messages. PTP messages are, however, forwarded
according to the rules of the switch.
●transparent
The device adopts the function of a transparent clock and forwards PTP messages to other
nodes while at the same time making entries in the correction field of the PTP message.
5.5.16.2 TC General
TC General
On this tab, you will find the general settings for PTP.
1588 Transparent Clock Configuration
Delay mechanism
Specify the delay mechanism the device will work with:
● End-to-end(delay request response mechanism will be used)
● Peer-to-peer (peer delay mechanism will be used)
Domain number
Enter the domain number for the device here. The device ignores PTP messages with a
different domain number. A SCALANCE device can only be assigned to one synchronization
domain.
5.5.16.3 TC Port
TC port
This tab contains the port settings for PTP.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 233
1588 Transparent Clock Port Parameters
The table shows detailed information about the individual ports:
●Port
The port number. With modular devices, the slot number and port number are displayed
separated by a dot.
●Setting
The port status. The following entries are possible:
– disabled
The port is not involved in PTP.
– enabled
The port processes PTP messages.
●Faulty Flag
The error status relating to PTP.
– true
An error occurred.
– false
No error has occurred on this port.
●Transport Mechanism
Choose how this port will handle PTP message data traffic. You can make different settings
for the ports of a device, however, the relevant communications partner must support the
selected transport mechanism. The following settings are possible:
– Ethernet
– UDP IPv4
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
234 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.5.17 RMON
5.5.17.1 Statistics
Statistics
On this page you can specify the ports for which RMON statistics are displayed.
The RMON statistics are displayed on the "Information > Ethernet Statistics" page on the
"Packet Size", "Packet Type" and "Packet Error" tabs.
Settings
Figure 5-14 RMON Statistics
●RMON
If you select this check box, Remote Monitoring (RMON) allows diagnostics data to be
collected on the device, prepared and read out using SNMP by a network management
station that also supports RMON. This diagnostic data, for example port-related load trends,
allow problems in the network to be detected early and eliminated.
Note
If you disable RMON, these statistics are not deleted but retain their last status.
●Port
Select the ports for which statistics will be displayed.
The table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 235
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Port
Shows the ports for which statistics will be displayed.
5.5.17.2 History
Samples of the statistics
On this page, you can specify whether or not samples of the statistics are saved for a port.
You can specify how many entries should be saved and at which intervals samples should be
taken.
Settings
Figure 5-15 RMON History
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports.
●Setting
Select the required setting. If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains
unchanged.
●Buckets
Enter the maximum number of samples to be stored at the same time. If "No Change" is
entered, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
236 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Interval[s]
Enter the interval after which the current status of the statistics will be saved as a sample.
If "No Change" is entered, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
Shows the port to which the settings relate.
●Setting
Enable or disable the recording of the history on the relevant port.
●Buckets
Enter the maximum number of samples to be stored at the same time.
●Interval[s]
Enter the interval after which the current status of the statistics will be saved as a sample.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 The "Layer 2" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 237
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
5.6.1 Configuration
Introduction
The page contains the overview of the layer 3 functions of the device. On this page, you enable
or disable the required layer 3 function.
The functions "Routing", "VRRP", "RIP" and "OSPF" are only available with layer 3.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Routing (only available with devices with a layer 3 license)
Enable or disable the routing function.
Note
You can only enable the routing function if DHCP is disabled on all configured interfaces.
●DHCP Relay Agent
Enable or disable the DHCP relay agent. You can configure other settings in "Layer 3 >
DHCP Relay Agent".
●VRRP (only available with devices with a layer 3 license if Routing was enabled)
Enable or disable routing using VRRP. To use VRRP, first enable the routing function. You
can configure other settings in "Layer 3 > VRRP".
●OSPF (only available with devices with a layer 3 license if routing was enabled)
Enable or disable routing using OSPF. You can configure other settings in "Layer 3 > OSPF".
●RIP (only available with devices with a layer 3 license if routing was enabled)
Enable or disable routing using RIP. You can configure other settings in "Layer 3 > RIP".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
238 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Steps in configuration
1. To use the required function, select the corresponding check box.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.2 Subnets
5.6.2.1 Overview
Creating subnets
The page shows the subnets for the selected interface. If more than one subnet is available
on an interface, in the first entry of this interface is of the address type "Primary".
All other subnets are created on this page. A subnet always relates to an interface. The
interface is created on the "Configuration" tab.
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Interface
In the "Interface" drop-down list, select the interface on which you want to configure a further
subnet.
The table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 239
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Interface
Shows the interface.
●TIA Interface
Shows the selected TIA interface.
●Interface Name
Shows the name of the interface.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address.
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the subnet.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask.
●Address Type
Displays the address type. The following values are possible:
– Primary
The first IP address that was configured on an IP interface.
– Secondary
All other IP addresses that were configured on an IP interface.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
240 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●IP Assign. Method
Shows how the IP address is assigned. The following values are possible:
– Static
The IP address is static. Enter the IP settings in "IP Address" and "Subnet Mask".
– Dynamic (DHCP)
The device obtains a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server.
●Address Collision Detection Status
If new IP addresses become active in the network, the "Address Collision Detection"
function checks whether this can result in address collisions. The allows IP addresses that
would be assigned twice to be detected.
Note
The function does not run a cyclic check.
This column shows the current status of the function. The following values are possible:
– Idle
The interface is not enabled and does not have an IP address.
– Starting
This status indicates the start-up phase. In this phase, the device initially sends a query
as to whether the planned IP address already exists. If the address is not yet been
assigned, the device sends the message that it is using this IP address as of now.
– Conflict
The interface is not enabled. The interface is attempting to use an IP address that has
already been assigned.
– Defending
The interface uses a unique IP address. Another interface is attempting to use the same
IP address.
– Active
The interface uses a unique IP address. There are no collisions.
– Not supported
The function for detection of address collisions is not supported.
– Disabled
The function for detection of address collisions is disabled.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the interface from the "Interface" drop-down list.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table.
3. Click the "Set Values" button. Configure the subnet on the "Configuration" tab.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 241
5.6.2.2 Configuration
On this page, you specify the name of the interface.
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Interface (Name)
Select the interface from the drop-down list.
●Interface Name
Enter the name of the interface.
●MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the selected interface.
●DHCP
Enable or disable the DHCP client for this IP interface.
Note
If you want to operate the device as a router with several interfaces, disable DHCP on all
interfaces.
●IP Address
Enter the IP address of the interface. IP addresses must not be used more than once.
●Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the subnet you are creating. Subnets on different interfaces must
not overlap.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
242 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Address Type
Shows the address type. The following values are possible:
– Primary
the first subnet of the interface.
– Secondary
All further subnets of the interface.
●TIA Interface
Specify whether or not this interface will become the TIA Interface.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the Interface from the "Interface (Name)" drop-down list.
2. Enter a name for the Interface in "Interface Name".
3. Enter the IP address of the subnet in the "IP Address" column.
4. Enter the subnet mask belonging to the IP address in the "Subnet Mask" column
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.3 Routes
Static route
On this page, you create the static routes.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 243
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Destination Network
Enter the network address of the destination.
●Subnet Mask
Enter the corresponding subnet mask.
●Gateway
Enter the IP address of the next gateway.
●Metric
Enter the metric for the route. The metric corresponds to the quality of a connection, for
example speed, costs. If there are several equal routes, the route with the lowest metric
value is used.
Range of values: 1 - 254
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Destination Network
Shows the network address of the destination.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the corresponding subnet mask.
●Gateway
Shows the IP address of the next gateway.
●Interface
Shows the Interface of the route.
●Metric
Enter the metric for the route. When creating the route, "not used" is entered automatically.
The metric corresponds to the quality of a connection, for example speed, costs. If there
are several equal routes, the route with the lowest metric value is used.
Range of values: 1 - 254
●Status
Shows whether or not the route is active.
Steps in configuration
1. Enter the network address of the destination in the "Destination Network" input box.
2. Enter the corresponding subnet mask in the "Subnet Mask" input box.
3. Enter the gateway in the "Gateway" input box.
4. Enter the weighting of the route in "Metric".
5. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
244 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.6.4 Route Maps
5.6.4.1 General
Route maps
With route maps, you control how routing information is further processed. You can filter routing
information and specify whether the information is further processed, modified or discarded.
Route maps operate according to the following principle:
● Routing information is compared with the filters of the route maps.
● The comparison is continued until the filters of a route map match the properties of an item
of information.
● The information is then processed according to the route map settings:
– The routing information is discarded.
– The properties of the routing information are changed.
Settings
Figure 5-16 Route maps general
●Name
Enter the name for the route map.
●Sequence Number
Enter a number for the route map.
You can create several route maps with the same name but with different sequence
numbers. The sequence numbers then specify the order in which the route maps are
processed.
The table has the following columns:
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 245
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Name
Shows the name of the route map.
●Sequence Number
Shows the sequence number of the route map.
●Action
Specify what happens to the routing information that matches the settings of the route map:
– permit
The routing information is further processed according to the settings you make in the
"Set" tab.
– deny
The routing information is discarded.
5.6.4.2 Inferface&Value Match
On this page, you specify whether or not the routing information for a route map is filtered
according to interfaces, metric or tags.
Settings
Figure 5-17 Route Maps Interface & Metric Match
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
246 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Route Map (Name/Seq.No.)
Select a route map.
The created route maps are available to you.
●Type
Select the basis for the filtering:
– Interface
– Metric
– Tag
●Interface
Select an interface.
This box is active only if you have selected the "Interface" entry in the "Type" drop-down
list.
●Metric
Enter a value for the metric.
This box is active only if you have selected the "Metric" entry in the "Type" drop-down list.
●Tag
Enter a value for the tag.
This box is active only if you have selected the "Tag" entry in the "Type" drop-down list.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Type
Shows the selected type:
– Interface
– Metric
– Tag
●Value
Shows the selected interface or the value of the metric or of the tag.
5.6.4.3 Destination Match
On this page, you specify whether or not the routing information for a route map is filtered
based on the destination IP address.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 247
Settings
Figure 5-18 Route Maps Destination Match
●Route Map (Name/Seq.No.)
Select a route map.
●IP Address
Enter the IP address of the destination on which the filtering is based.
●Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the destination on which the filtering is based.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the destination.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask of the destination.
5.6.4.4 Next Hop Match
On this page, you specify whether or not the filtering for a route map will be based on the router
to which the routing information is sent next.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
248 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Settings
Figure 5-19 Route Maps Next Hop Match
●Route Map (Name/Seq.No.)
Select a route map.
●IP Address
Enter the IP address of the router to which the routing information will be sent next.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the next router.
5.6.4.5 Set Configuration
On this page, you specify whether or not the routing information will be changed by a route
map.
You can only change the information of a "Permit" route map.
If, for example, you have filtered based on a certain metric, you can change the value of the
metric here. The routing information is then forwarded with the new value.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 249
Settings
Figure 5-20 Route maps set
●Route Map (Name/Seq.No.)
Select a route map.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Name
Shows the name of the route map.
●Sequence Number
Shows the sequence number of the route map.
●Metric
Enter the new value for the metric with which the routing information will be forwarded.
●Tag
Enter the new value for the tag with which the routing information will be forwarded.
5.6.5 DHCP Relay Agent
5.6.5.1 General
DHCP Relay Agent
If the DHCP server is in a different network, the device cannot reach the DHCP server. The
DHCP relay agent intercedes between a DHCP server and the device. The DHCP relay agent
forwards the port number of the device with the DHCP query to the DHCP server.
You can specify up to 4 DHCP server IP addresses for the DHCP relay agent. If a DHCP server
is unreachable, the device can switch to a different DHCP server.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
250 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●DHCP Relay Agent (opt. 82)
Enable or disable the DHCP relay agent.
●Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the DHCP server.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Server IP Address
Shows the IP address of the DHCP server.
Steps in configuration
1. Enter the IP address of the DHCP server in the "Server IP Address" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
3. Select the "DHCP Relay Agent (Opt. 82)"check box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.5.2 Option
Parameters of the DHCP relay agent
On this page, you can specify parameters for the DHCP server, for example the circuit ID.
The circuit ID describes the origin of the DHCP query, for example which port received the
DHCP query.
You specify the DHCP server on the "General" tab.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 251
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Circuit ID Router Index
Enable or disable the check box. If you enable the check box, the generated circuit ID of
the has the router index added to it.
●Circuit ID Receive VLAN ID
Enable or disable the check box. If you enable the check box, the generated circuit ID has
the VLAN ID added to it.
●Circuit ID Receive Port
Enable or disable the check box. If you enable the check box, the generated circuit ID has
the receiving port added to it.
Note
You need to select a least one option.
●Remote ID
Shows the device ID.
●Interface
Select the interface from the drop-down list.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Interface
Shows the interface.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
252 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Remote ID Type
Select the type of device ID from the drop-down list. You have the following options:
– IP Address
The IP address of the device is used as the device ID.
– MAC Address
The MAC address of the device is used as the device ID.
– Free Text
If you use "Free Text", you can enter the device name as the device ID in "Remote ID".
●Remote ID
Enter the device name. The box can only be edited if you select the entry "Free Text" for
"Remote ID Type".
●Circuit ID Type
Select the type of circuit ID from the drop-down list. You have the following options:
– Predefined
The circuit ID is created automatically based on the router index, VLAN ID or port.
– Free Number
If you use "Free Number", you can enter the ID for "Circuit ID".
●Circuit ID
Enter the circuit ID. The box can only be edited if you select the "Free number" entry for
the "Circuit ID Type".
Range of values: 1- 188
Steps in configuration
Follow the steps below to specify automatic assignment of the parameters:
1. Select the "Circuit ID Router Index" check box.
2. Select the interface from the "Interface" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table
4. Select the entry "IP Address" in the "Remote ID Type" drop-down list. The IP address is
used as the device ID.
5. Select the "Predefined" entry in the "Circuit ID Type" drop-down list. The router index is
added to the generated Circuit ID.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Follow the steps below to specify the parameters manually:
1. Select the "Circuit ID Router Index" check box.
2. Select the interface from the "Interface" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table
4. Select the entry "Free Text" in the "Remote ID Type" drop-down list. Enter the device ID in
"Remote ID".
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 253
5. Select the entry "Free Number" in the "Circuit ID Type" drop-down list. Enter the ID in "Circuit
ID".
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.6 VRRP
5.6.6.1 Router
Introduction
Using the "Create" button, you can create new virtual routers. A maximum of 52 Virtual routers
can be configured. You can configure other parameters on the "Configuration" tab.
Note
● This function is available only with layer 3.
● Select the "VRRP" check box to configure VRRP.
● You can only use VRRP in conjunction with VLAN interfaces. Router ports are not
supported.
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●VRRP
Enable or disable routing using VRRP.
●Reply to pings on virtual interfaces
When enabled, the virtual IP addresses also reply to the ping.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
254 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Interface
Select the Interface that functions as the virtual router from the drop-down list.
●VRID
Enter the ID of the virtual router in the input box. This ID defines the group of routers that
form a virtual router (VR). In the group, this is the same. It can no longer be used for other
groups.
Valid values are 1.. 255.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Interface
Shows the Interface that functions as the virtual router.
●VRID
Shows the ID of the virtual router.
●Virtual MAC Address
Shows the Virtual MAC address of the virtual router.
●Primary IP Address
Shows the primary IP address on this VLAN. The entry 0.0.0.0 means that the "Primary"
address on this VLAN is used. Otherwise all IP addresses configured on this VLAN in the
"Subnets" menu are valid addresses.
●Router State
Shows the current status of the virtual router. Possible values are:
– Master
The router is the Master router and handles the routing functionality for all assigned IP
addresses.
– Backup
The router is the backup router. If the master router fails, the backup router takes over
the tasks of the master router.
– Initialize
The virtual router has just been turned on. It will soon change to the "Master" or "Backup"
state.
●Master IP Address
Shows the IP address of the master router.
●Priority
Shows the priority of the virtual router.
Valid values are 1-254.
The current master router is given 255 automatically. All other priorities can be distributed
freely among the VRRP routers. The higher the priority, the earlier the VRRP router
becomes "Master".
●Advert. Interval
Shows the interval at which the master router sends VRRP packets.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 255
●Preempt
Shows the precedence of a router when changing roles between backup and master.
– yes
This router has precedence when changing roles.
– no
This router does not have precedence when changing roles.
●Reply to pings on virtual interfaces
Shows whether this virtual IP address replies to pings.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the "VRRP" check box.
2. Select the interface from the "Interface" drop-down list.
3. Enter the ID of the virtual router in the "VRID" input box.
4. Select the "Reply to pings on virtual interfaces" check box so that virtual IP addresses reply
to pings as well.
5. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table.
6. Click the "Set Values" button. To configure the virtual router, click on the "Configuration"
tab.
5.6.6.2 Configuration
Introduction
On this page, you configure the virtual router.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
256 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Interface / VRID
Select the ID of the virtual router you want to configure from the function drop-down list.
●Primary IP Address
Select the primary IP address from the drop-down list. If the router becomes master router,
the router uses this IP address.
Note
If you only configure one subnet on this VLAN, no entry is necessary. The entry is then
0.0.0.0.
If you configure more than one subnet on the VLAN and you want a specific IP address
to be used as the source address for VRRP packets, select the IP address from the drop-
down list. Otherwise, the IP address with priority will be used.
●Master
If this option is enabled, the highest priority IP address is entered for "Associated IP
Address". This means that the highest priority IP address of the VRRP router is used as
the virtual IP address of the virtual master router. The option must be disabled for the backup
routers in this group and the IP address of the router in "Associated IP Address" must be
used.
●Priority
Enter the priority of this virtual router. Valid values are 1-254.
The current Master router is always given 255. All other priorities can be distributed freely
among the redundant routers. The higher the priority, the earlier the router becomes
"Master".
●Advertisement Interval
Enter the interval in seconds after which a master router sends a VRRP packet again.
●Preempt lower priority Master
Allow precedence when changing roles between backup and master based on the selection
process.
Steps in configuration
To configure a virtual router as the master router, follow the steps below:
1. Select the ID of the virtual router you want to configure from the "Interface /VRID" drop-
down list.
2. Select the "Status" check box.
3. Select the source address from the "Primary IP Address" drop-down list.
4. From the "Priority" drop-down list, enter the priority of this virtual router.
5. Select the "Master" check box.
6. Enter the interval in "Advertisement Interval".
7. Select the "Preempt lower priority Master" check box.
8. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 257
5.6.6.3 Addresses Overview
Overview
This page shows which IP addresses the virtual router monitors. Each virtual router can monitor
a maximum of 10 IP addresses.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Description of the displayed boxes:
The table has the following columns:
●Interface
Shows the Interface that functions as the virtual router.
●VR ID
Shows the ID of this virtual router.
●Number of Addresses
Shows the number of IP addresses.
●Associated IP Address (1) ... Associated IP Address (10)
Shows the router IP addresses monitored by this virtual router. If a router takes over the
role of master, the routing function is taken over by this router for all these IP addresses.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
258 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.6.6.4 Addresses Configuration
Creating or changing the monitored IP addresses
On this page, you can create, modify or delete the IP addresses to be monitored. A maximum
of 10 IP addresses can be monitored by a virtual router.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Interface / VRID
Select the virtual router from the drop-down list.
●Associated IP Address
Enter the IP address that the virtual router will monitor.
A maximum of 10 IP addresses are possible.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Associated IP Address
Shows the IP addresses that the virtual router monitors.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the ID of the virtual router from the "Interface / VRID" drop-down list.
2. Enter the IP address that the virtual router will monitor.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 259
5.6.7 OSPFv2
5.6.7.1 Configuration
Introduction
On this page, you configure routing with OSPF.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes
●OSPFv2
Enable or disable routing using OSPF.
●Router ID
Enter the name of one of the OSPF interfaces. The name is entered in the IP address format
and does not need to match the local IP address. The router ID must be unique in the
network.
●OSPFv2 RFC 1583 Compatibility
Enable the option if you still have old OSPF routers in operation that are not compatible
with RFC 2328.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
260 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Border Router
Shows the status of the OSPF router. If the local system is an active member in at least 2
areas, this is an area border router.
●AS Border Router
Specify whether or not the router is an AS border router. An AS border router intercedes
between multiple autonomous systems, for example if you have an additional RIP network.
An AS border router is also necessary to add and to distribute static routes.
●New LSA Received
Shows the number of received LSAs.
Updates and local LSAs are not counted.
●New LSA Configured
Number of different LSAs sent by this local system.
●External LSA Maximum
To limit the number of entries of external LSAs in the database, enter the maximum number
of external LSAs.
●Exit Interval (s)
Enter the interval after which the OSPF router once again attempts to come out of the
overflow status. A 0 means that the OSPF router attempts to exit the overflow status only
following a restart.
●Inbound Filter
Select a route map that filters inbound routes.
●Redistribute Routes (Default/Connected/Static)
Specify which known routes are distributed using OSPF. You can make different decisions
for the route types Default, Connected and Static.
Note
The options can only be enabled on an AS border router. Enabling the Default and Static
options, in particular, can cause problems if they are enabled at too many points in the
network, for example, forwarding loops.
●Route Map
Select a route map that filters which routes are forwarded using RIPv2.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the "OSPFv2" check box.
2. Enter the ID of the router in the "Router ID" input box.
3. Select the "AS Border Router" check box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 261
5.6.7.2 Areas
Overview
An autonomous system can be divided into smaller areas.
On this page, you can view, create, modify or delete the areas of the router.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Description of the displayed values
The page contains the following boxes:
●Area ID
Enter the identifier of the area. The database is synchronized for all routers of an area. The
area identifier must be unique in the network.
The area identifier is a 32-bit number with the following format: x.x.x.x where x = 0 ... 255
The area identifier 0.0.0.0 is reserved for the backbone area.
This table contains the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Area ID
Shows the identifier of the area.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
262 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Area Type
Select the area type in the drop-down list.
– Standard
– Stub
– NSSA
– Backbone
●Summary
Specify whether summary LSAs are generated for this area.
– Summary: Summary LSAs are generated and sent to the area.
– No Summary: Summary LSAs are not generated and sent to the area.
●Metric
Displays the costs for the OSPF interface.
●Updates
Shows the number of recalculations of the routing tables.
●LSA Count
Shows the number of LSAs in the database.
●Area BR
Shows the number of reachable area border routers (ABR) within this area.
●AS BR
Shows the number of reachable autonomous system border routers (ASBR) in this area.
Steps in configuration
1. Enter the ID for the area in the "Area ID" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
3. Select the type of area, for example Stub in the "Area Type" drop-down list.
4. Select the "Summary LSA" entry in the "Summary" drop-down list.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.7.3 Area Range
Creating a new OSPFv2 area range
Using the "New Entry" button in the "OSPFv2 Area Ranges" menu, up to four networks can
be grouped together under one area ID. The method is used only with area border routers.
This means that an area border router only advertises one route for each address area to the
outside.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 263
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Area ID
Select the ID of the area from the drop-down list. You specify the ID on the "Areas" tab.
●Subnet Address
Enter the IP address of the network that will be grouped.
●Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the network that will be grouped.
This table contains the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Area ID
Shows the ID of the area.
●Subnet Address
Shows the IP address of the network that will be grouped.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask of the network that will be grouped.
●Advertise
Enable this option to advertise the grouped network.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the ID of the area from the drop-down list.
2. Enter the IP address of the network that will be grouped.
3. Enter the subnet mask of the network that will be grouped.
4. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
5. Enable the "Advertise" option to advertise the grouped network.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
264 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.6.7.4 Interfaces
Overview
On this page, you can configure OSPF interfaces.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●IP Address
Select the IP address of the OSPF interface from the drop-down list.
●Area ID
Select the ID of the area that is connected to the OSPF interface from the drop-down list.
Note
For the secondary interfaces, select the same Area ID as for the corresponding primary
interface.
The information whether an interface is primary or secondary can be found in the "Address
Type" column on the "Subnets" > "Overview (Page 239)" page.
Select the ID of the area that is connected to the OSPF interface from the drop-down list. The
table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●IP Address
Shows the IP address of the OSPF interface.
●Area ID
Select the ID of the area that is connected to the OSPF interface from the drop-down list.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 265
●OSPF Status
Specify whether OSPF is active on the Interface.
– Enabled: OSPF is enabled on the interface.
– Disabled: OSPF is disabled on the interface
●Metric
Enter the costs for the OSPF interface.
●Priority
Enter the router priority. The priority is only relevant for selecting the designated router or
designated border router. This parameter can be selected differently on routers within the
same subnet.
Range of values: 0 to 255
Default: 1.
●Trans. Delay
Enter the expected delay when sending a connection update.
Range of values: 1 s to 3600 s
Default: 1 s
●Retrans. Interval
Enter the time after which an OSPF packet is transferred again if no confirmation was
received.
Range of values: 1 s to 3600 s
Default: 5 s
●Hello Interval
Enter the interval between two Hello packets.
Range of values: 1 s to 65,535 s
Default: 10 s
●Dead Interval
Enter the interval after which the neighbor router is marked as "failed" if no more Hello
packets are received from it during this time.
Default: 40 s
Steps in configuration
1. Select the IP address of the OSPF interface from the "IP Address" drop-down list.
2. Select the ID of the area with which the OSPF interface is connected from the "Area ID"
drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Select the check box beside "OSPF Status".
5. Enter suitable values or use the default settings for "Transit Delay", "Retrans. Delay" and
"Dead Interval".
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
266 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.6.7.5 Interface authentication
Configuring interface authentication
On this page, you define the authentication of the interface.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●OSPF Interface
Select the OSPF interface for which you want to configure authentication.
●Authentication Type
Select the authentication method. You have the following options:
– none
No authentication
– simple
Authentication using an unencrypted password
– MD5
Authentication using MD5
Section "Simple Authentication"
●Password
Enter a password.
●Confirmation
Confirm the entered password.
Section "MD5 Authentication"
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 267
●Authentication Key ID
Enter the identifier of the MD5 authentication key.
Enter the ID for MD5 authentication with which the password will be used as a key.
Since the key ID is transferred with the protocol, the same key must be stored under the
same key ID on all neighboring routers.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Authentication Key ID
Can only be edited if you set the MD5 authentication method. It is only possible to use
several keys there.
●MD5 Key
Enter the MD5 key.
●MD5 Key Confirmation
Confirm the entered key.
●Youngest Key ID
Shows whether or not the MD5 key is the latest key ID.
Steps in configuration
1. Select the OSPF interface and the authentication method from the drop-down lists.
2. Enter the following data in the relevant input box:
– Password
– Confirmation of the password
– Identifier of the MD5 authentication key
3. Click the "Create" button.
5.6.7.6 Virtual Links
Overview
Due to the protocol, each area border router must have access to the backbone area. If a
router is not connected directly to the backbone area, a virtual link to it is created.
Note
This function is available only with layer 3.
Note
Note that when creating a virtual link both the transit area and the backbone area must already
be configured.
A virtual link must be configured identically at both ends.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
268 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following note:
●Since the device not an ABR, Virtual Links are not functional
This is displayed when at least one virtual link entry is configured and the device is not an
area border router.
The page contains the following boxes:
●Neighbor Router ID
Enter the ID of the neighbor router at the other end of the virtual connection.
●Transit Area ID
Select the ID of the area that connects both routers from the drop-down list.
This table contains the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Transit Area ID
Shows the ID via which the two routers are connected.
●Neighbor Router ID
Shows the ID of the neighbor router at the other end of the virtual link.
●Virt. Link Status
Specify the status of the virtual link. The following states are possible:
– down: The virtual link is inactive.
– point-to-point: The virtual link is active.
●Trans. Delay
Enter the expected delay when sending a link update packet.
Range of values: 1 s to 3600 s
Default: 1 s
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 269
●Retrans. Delay
Enter the time after which a packet is transferred again if no confirmation was received.
Range of values: 1 s to 3600 s
Default: 5 s
●Hello Interval
Enter the interval between two Hello packets.
Range of values: 1 s to 65,535 s
Default: 10 s
●Dead Interval
Enter the interval after which the neighbor router counts as "failed" if no more Hello packets
are received from it during this time.
Default setting: 40 s
Steps in configuration
1. Enter the ID of the neighbor router at the other end of the virtual link in "Neighbor Router
ID".
2. Select the area ID that connects the two routers from the "Transit Area ID" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. Enter suitable values for "Transit Delay", "Retrans. Delay" and "Dead Interval".
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
270 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.6.7.7 Virtual link authentication
Configuring the interface login
On this page, you define the authentication of the interface.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Virtual Link (Area/Neighbor)
Select the virtual link for which you want to configure authentication.
●Authentication Type
Select the authentication method. You have the following options:
– none
No authentication
– simple
Authentication using an unencrypted password
– MD5
Authentication using MD5
Section "Simple Authentication"
●Password
Enter a password.
●Confirmation
Confirm the entered password.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 271
Section "MD5 Authentication"
●Authentication Key ID
Enter the identifier of the MD5 authentication key.
Enter the ID for MD5 authentication with which the password will be used as a key.
Since the key ID is transferred with the protocol, the same key must be stored under the
same key ID on all neighboring routers.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Authentication Key ID
Can only be edited if you set the MD5 authentication method. It is only possible to use
several keys there.
●MD5 Key
Enter the MD5 key.
●MD5 Key Confirmation
Confirm the entered key.
●Youngest Key ID
Shows whether or not the MD5 key is the latest key ID.
Steps in configuration
Follow these steps:
1. Select the virtual connection and the authentication method from the drop-down lists.
2. Enter the following data in the relevant input box:
– Password
– Confirmation of the password
– Identifier of the MD5 authentication key
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.8 RIPv2
5.6.8.1 RIPv2 Configuration
On this page, you configure routing with RIP.
Note
RIPv2 is available only on layer 3.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
272 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Settings
Figure 5-21 RIPv2 Configuration
●RIPv2
Enable or disable routing using RIPv2.
●Inbound Filter
Select a route map that filters inbound routes.
●Redistribute Routes
Specify which known routes are distributed using RIPv2.
The following types of route exist:
– Static Default
– Connected
– Static
– OSPF
●Route Map
Select a route map that filters which routes are forwarded using RIPv2.
5.6.8.2 RIPv2 Interfaces
Overview
On this page, you can configure RIPv2 interfaces.
Note
RIPv2 is available only on layer 3.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 273
Settings
Figure 5-22 RIPv2 Interfaces
●IP Address
Select the IP address of the RIPv2 interface.
This table contains the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●IP Address
Displays the IP address of the RIPv2 interface.
●Send Updates
Select the way in which updates are sent:
– no send
No updates are sent.
– RIPv1
Updates for RIPv1 are sent.
– RIPv1-compat.
RIPv2 updates are sent as broadcasts according to the rules of RIPv1.
– RIPv2
Updates for RIPv2 are sent as multicasts.
– RIPv1 demand/RIPv2 demand
RIP packets are sent only as a response to an explicit query.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
274 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Receive Updates
Select the form in which received updates are accepted:
– no receive
No updates are received.
– RIPv1
Only updates of RIPv1 are received.
– RIPv2
Only updates of RIPv2 are received.
– RIPv1/v2
Updates of RIPv1 and RIPv2 are received.
●Default Metric
Enter the costs for the RIPv2 interface.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 The "Layer 3" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 275
5.7 The "Security" menu
5.7.1 Passwords
Configuration of the device passwords
Changes to the device passwords for administrator and users can only be made locally by the
administrator.
Procedure
1. From the "Username" drop-down list, select the user whose password you want to change.
Select between "Admin" and "User".
2. Enter the valid administrator password in the "Current Admin Password" input box.
3. Enter the new password for the selected user in the "New Password" input box. The new
password must be at least 6 characters long.
4. Repeat the new password in the "Password Confirmation" input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
The factory settings for the passwords when the devices ship are as follows:
● admin: admin
● user: user
If you log on the first time or log on after a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
will be prompted to change the password.
Note
Changing the password in Trial mode
Even if you change the password in Trial mode, this change is saved immediately.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
276 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.7.2 AAA
5.7.2.1 General
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●Login Authentication
Specify how the login is made:
– Local
Login with local user name and password.
– Radius
Login using a Radius server.
5.7.2.2 Radius client
Authentication over an external server
The concept of RADIUS is based on an external authentication server. An end device can only
access the network after the device has verified the logon data of the device with the
authentication server. Both the end device and the authentication server must support the EAP
protocol (Extensive Authentication Protocol).
Each column of the table contains access data for one server. In the search order, the primary
server is queried first. If the primary server cannot be reached, secondary servers are queried
in the order in which they are entered.
If no server responds, there is no authentication. The client has no access to the network
although a link is indicated at the port.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 277
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Server Address
Enter the IP address of the server here.
●Server Port
Here, enter the input port on the RADIUS server. As default, input port 1812 is set. The
range of values is 1 to 65535.
●Shared Secret
Enter your access ID here.
●Shared Secret Conf.
Enter your access ID again as confirmation.
●Max. Retrans.
Here, enter the maximum number of query attempts before another configured RADIUS
server is queried or the logon counts as having failed. As default, 3 is set. The range of
values is 1 to 254.
●Primary server
Using the options in the drop-down list, specify whether or not this server is the primary
server. You can select one of the options "yes" or "no".
●Status
With this check box, you can enable or disable the RADIUS server.
Note
You can configure a maximum of two servers on this page.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
278 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Steps in configuration
Entering a new server
1. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
The following default values are entered in the table:
– Server IP address: 0.0.0.0
– Port number: 1812
– Maximum number of transmission retries: 3
– Primary server: No
2. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– Server IP address
– Port number of the destination
– Secret access ID
– Repetition of the secret access ID
– Maximum number of transmission retries
– Primary server
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Repeat this procedure for every server you want to enter.
Modifying servers
1. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– IP address
– Port number of the destination
– Secret access ID
– Repetition of the secret access ID
– Maximum number of transmission retries
– Primary server
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Repeat this procedure for every server whose entry you want to modify
Deleting servers
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 279
1. Click the check box in the first column before the row you want to delete to select the entry
for deletion.
Repeat this for all entries you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The data is deleted from the memory of the device and the page
is updated.
Note
If you click the "Refresh" button before you have transferred your configuration changes
with the "Set Values" or "Delete" button, your changes will be canceled and the previous
configuration is loaded from the memory of the device and displayed.
5.7.2.3 802.1x authenticator
Enabling authentication for individual ports
By selecting the check box, you specify whether or not network access protection according
to IEEE 802.1x is enabled on this port.
Figure 5-23 802.1x Authenticator - first part of the table
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
280 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Figure 5-24 802.1x Authenticator - second part of the table
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
●MAC Authentication
Enable or disable MAC authentication for the device.
●Guest VLAN
Enable or disable the "Guest VLAN" function for the device.
Table 1 has the following columns:
●1st column
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
●802.1x Auth. Control
Select the required setting.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●802.1x Re-Authentication
Select the required setting.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●MAC Authentication
Select the required setting.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 281
●RADIUS VLAN Assignment Allowed
Select the required setting.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●MAC Auth. Max Allowed Addresses
Specify how many end devices can be connected to the port at the same time.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●Guest VLAN
Select the required setting.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●Guest VLAN ID
Select the required setting.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●Guest VLAN Max Allowed Addresses
Specify how many end devices are permitted in the guest VLAN at the same time.
If "No Change" is selected, the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
●Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
●Port
This column lists all the ports available on this device.
●802.1x Auth. Control
Specify the authentication of the port:
– Force Unauthorized
Data traffic via the port is blocked.
– Force Authorized
Data traffic via the port is allowed without any restrictions.
Default setting
– Auto
End devices are authenticated on the port with the "802.1x" method.
The data traffic via the port is permitted or blocked depending on the authentication
result.
●802.1x Re-Authentication
Enable this option if you want reauthentication of an already authenticated end device to
be repeated cyclically.
●MAC Authentication
Enable this option if you want end devices to be authenticated with the "MAC
Authentication" method.
●RADIUS VLAN Assignment Allowed
The RADIUS server informs the IE switch of the VLAN to which the port belongs.
Enable this option if you want the information of the server to be taken into account. The
port then belongs to the corresponding VLAN.
If the option is disabled, the VLAN information is discarded.
●MAC Auth. Max Allowed Addresses
Enter how many end devices are allowed to be connected to the port at the same time.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
282 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Guest VLAN
Enable this option if you want the end device to be permitted in the "Guest VLAN" if
authentication fails.
●Guest VLAN ID
Enter the VLAN ID of the port.
●Guest VLAN Max Allowed Addresses
Enter how many end devices are allowed in the guest VLAN at the same time.
●802.1x Auth. Status
Shows the status of the port authentication:
– Force Unauthorized
– Force Authorized
– Auto
●MAC Auth. Actual Allowed Addresses
Shows the number of currently connected end devices.
●MAC Auth. Actual Blocked Addresses
Shows the number of currently blocked end devices.
●Guest VLAN Actual Allowed Addresses
Shows how many end devices are currently allowed in the guest VLAN.
Steps in configuration
Enabling authentication for an individual port
1. Select the required options in the relevant row in table 2.
2. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Enabling authentication for all ports
1. Select the required options in table 1.
2. Click the "Copy to Table" button. The check box is enabled for all ports in table 2.
3. To apply the changes, click the "Set Values" button.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 283
5.7.3 Port ACL MAC
5.7.3.1 Rules Configuration
Introduction
On this page, you specify the access rules for the MAC-based ACL.
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the ACL rule. If you click the "Create" button, a new row with a unique
number is created.
●Source MAC
Enter the unicast MAC address of the source.
●Dest. MAC
Enter the unicast MAC address of the destination.
●Action
Select the action from the drop-down list. The following is possible:
– Forward
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is forwarded.
– Discard
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is not forwarded.
●Ingress Ports
Shows a list of all ingress ports to which this rule applies
●Egress Ports
Shows a list of all egress ports to which this rule applies
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
284 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Note
Entering the MAC addresses
If you enter the address "00:00:00:00:00:00" for the source and/or destination MAC address,
the rule created in this way applies to all source or destination MAC addresses.
Steps in configuration
1. Click the "Create" button. A new row with a unique number (rule number) is created in the
table.
2. Enter the MAC address of the source in "Source Mac".
3. Enter the MAC address of the destination in "Dest. MAC".
4. For "Action", specify whether the frame is forwarded or denied if the frame complies with
the ACL rule.
5.7.3.2 Port Ingress Rules
Introduction
On this page, you specify the ACL rule according to which incoming frames are filtered at the
port.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 285
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes
●"Ports" drop-down list
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
●"Add Rules" drop-down list
From the drop-down list, select the ACL rule that will be assigned to the port. You specify
the ACL rule on the "Rules Configuration" tab.
●"Add" button
To permanently assign the ACL rule to the port, click the "Add" button. The configuration
is shown in the table.
●"Remove Rule" drop-down list
From the "Remove Rule" drop-down list, select the ACL rule to be deleted.
●"Remove" button
To remove the ACL rule from the port, click the "Remove" button.
The table has the following columns:
●Rule Order
Shows the order of the ACL rules.
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the ACL rule.
●Source MAC
Shows the unicast MAC address of the source.
●Dest. MAC
Shows the unicast MAC address of the destination.
●Action
Shows the action.
– Forward
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is forwarded.
– Discard
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is not forwarded.
Steps in configuration
Follow the steps below to assign an ACL rule to a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Add" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
Follow the steps below to remove an ACL rule from a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Remove" button. The corresponding entry is removed in the table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
286 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.7.3.3 Port Egress Rules
Introduction
On this page, you specify the ACL rule according to which outgoing frames are filtered at the
port.
Description of the displayed boxes
●"Ports" drop-down list
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
●"Add Rules" drop-down list
From the drop-down list, select the ACL rule that will be assigned to the port. You specify
the ACL rule on the "Rules Configuration" tab.
●"Add" button
To permanently assign the ACL rule to the port, click the "Add" button. The configuration
is shown in the table.
●"Remove Rule" drop-down list
From the "Remove Rule" drop-down list, select the ACL rule to be deleted.
●"Remove" button
To remove the ACL rule from the port, click the "Remove" button.
The table has the following columns:
●Rule Order
Shows the order of the ACL rules.
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the ACL rule.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 287
●Source MAC
Shows the unicast MAC address of the source.
●Dest. MAC
Shows the unicast MAC address of the destination.
●Action
Shows the action.
– Forward
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is forwarded.
– Discard.
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is not forwarded.
Steps in configuration
Follow the steps below to assign an ACL rule to a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Add" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
Follow the steps below to remove an ACL rule from a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Remove" button. The corresponding entry is removed in the table.
5.7.4 Port ACL IP
5.7.4.1 Rules Configuration
Introduction
On this page, you specify the rules for the IP-based ACL.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
288 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the ACL rule. If you click the "Create" button, a new row with a unique
number is created.
●Source IP
Enter the IP address of the source.
●Source Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask in which the source is located.
●Dest. IP
Enter the IP address of the destination.
●Source Dest. Mask
Enter the subnet mask in which the destination is located.
●Action
Select the action from the drop-down list. The following is possible:
– Forward
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is forwarded.
– Discard
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is not forwarded.
●Ingress Ports
Shows a list of all ingress ports to which this rule applies
●Egress Ports
Shows a list of all egress ports to which this rule applies
Note
Subnet mask for individual hosts
If you create the rule for a single system (one IP address), you will need to specify a 32-Bit
long subnet mask. This is then "255.255.255.255".
Steps in configuration
1. Click the "Create" button. A new row with a unique number (rule number) is created in the
table.
2. Enter the data of the source in "Source IP" and in "Source Subnet Mask".
3. Enter the data of the destination in "Source IP" and in "Source Dest Mask".
4. For the action, specify whether the frame will be forwarded or denied if the frame complies
with the ACL rule.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 289
5.7.4.2 Protocol Configuration
On this page, you specify the rules for protocols.
Settings
Figure 5-25 Port ACL IP Protocol Configuration
The table has the following columns:
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the protocol rule. When you create a rule, a new row with a unique
number is created.
●Protocol
Select the protocol for which this rule is valid.
●Protocol Number
Enter a protocol number to define further protocols.
This box can only be edited if you have set "Other Protocol" for the protocol.
●Soure Port Min.
Enter the lowest possible port number of the source port.
This box can only be edited if you have set "TCP" or "UDP" for the protocol.
●Source Port Max.
Enter the highest possible port number of the source port.
This box can only be edited if you have set "TCP" or "UDP" for the protocol.
●Dest. Port Min.
Enter the lowest possible port number of the destination port.
This box can only be edited if you have set "TCP" or "UDP" for the protocol.
●Dest. Port Max.
Enter the highest possible port number of the destination port.
This box can only be edited if you have set "TCP" or "UDP" for the protocol.
●Message Type
Enter a message type to decide the format of the message.
This box can only be edited if you have set "ICMP" for the protocol.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
290 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
●Message Code
Enter a message code to specify the function of the message.
This box can only be edited if you have set "ICMP" for the protocol.
●DSCP
Enter a value for classifying the priority.
This box cannot be edited if you have set "ICMP" for the protocol.
5.7.4.3 Port Ingress Rules
Introduction
On this page, you specify the ACL rule according to which incoming frames are handled by
the port.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes
●Drop-down list "Ports"
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
●Drop-down list "Add Rules"
From the drop-down list, select the ACL rule that will be assigned to the port. You specify
the ACL rule on the "Rules Configuration" tab.
●"Add" button
To permanently assign the ACL rule to the port, click the "Add" button. The configuration
is shown in the table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 291
●Drop-down list "Remove Rule"
From the "Remove Rule" drop-down list, select the ACL rule to be deleted.
●"Remove" button
To remove the ACL rule from the port, click the "Remove" button.
The table has the following columns:
●Rule Order
Shows the order of the ACL rules. In
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the ACL rule. If you click the "Create" button, a new row with a unique
number is created.
●Source IP
Shows the IP address of the source.
●Source Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask in which the source is located.
●Dest. IP
Shows the IP address of the destination.
●Source Dest. Mask
Shows the subnet mask in which the destination is located.
●Action
Select the action from the drop-down list. The following reactions are possible:
– Forward
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is forwarded.
– Discard
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is not forwarded.
Steps in configuration
Follow the steps below to assign an ACL rule to a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Add" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
Follow the steps below to remove an ACL rule from a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Remove" button. The corresponding entry is removed in the table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
292 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
5.7.4.4 Port Egress Rules
Introduction
On this page, you specify the ACL rule according to which outgoing frames are handled by the
port.
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes
●Drop-down list "Ports"
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
●Drop-down list "Add Rules"
From the drop-down list, select the ACL rule that will be assigned to the port. You specify
the ACL rule on the "Rules Configuration" tab.
●"Add" button
To permanently assign the ACL rule to the port, click the "Add" button. The configuration
is shown in the table.
●Drop-down list "Remove Rule"
From the "Remove Rule" drop-down list, select the ACL rule to be deleted.
●"Remove" button
To remove the ACL rule from the port, click the "Remove" button.
The table has the following columns:
●Rule Order
Shows the order of the ACL rules. In
●Rule Number
Shows the number of the ACL rule. If you click the "Create" button, a new row with a unique
number is created.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 293
●Source IP
Shows the IP address of the source.
●Source Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask in which the source is located.
●Dest. IP
Shows the IP address of the destination.
●Source Dest. Mask
Shows the subnet mask in which the destination is located.
●Action
Select the action from the drop-down list. The following reactions are possible:
– Forward
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is forwarded.
– Discard
If the frame complies with the ACL rule, the frame is not forwarded.
Steps in configuration
Follow the steps below to assign an ACL rule to a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Add" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
Follow the steps below to remove an ACL rule from a port:
1. Select the port in the "Ports" drop-down list.
2. Select the ACL rule in the "Rules" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Remove" button. The corresponding entry is removed in the table.
5.7.5 Management ACL
Description of configuration
On this page, you can increase the security of your device. To specify which station with which
IP address is allowed to access your device, configure the IP address or an entire address
range.
You can select the protocols and the ports of the station with which it is allowed to access the
device. You define the VLAN in which the station may be located. This ensures that only certain
stations within a VLAN have access to the device.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
294 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Description of the displayed boxes
Note
If you enable this function, note the following
A bad configuration on the "Management Access Control List" page can result in you being
unable to access the device. You should therefore configure an access rule that allows access
to the management before you enable the function.
The page contains the following boxes:
●Management ACL
Enable or disable access control to the management of the IE switch.
As default, the function is disabled.
Note
If the function is disabled, there is unrestricted access to the management of the IE switch.
The configured access rules are only taken into account when the function is enabled.
●IP Address
Enter the IP address or the network address to which the rule will apply. If you use the IP
address 0.0.0.0, the settings apply to all IP addresses.
●Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask. The subnet mask 255.255.255.255 is for a specific IP address. If
you want to allow a subnet, for example a C subnet, enter 255.255.255.0. The subnet mask
0.0.0.0 applies to all subnets.
The table has the following columns:
●Select
Select the row you want to delete.
●Rule Order
Shows the order of the ACL rules.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 295
●IP Address
Shows the IP address.
●Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask.
●VLANs Allowed
Enter the number of the VLAN in which the device is located. The station can only access
the device if it is located in this configured VLAN. If this input box remains empty, there is
no restriction relating to the VLANs.
●Out-Band
Specify whether or not the IP address can access the switch via the out-band port.
●SNMP
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) can access the device using the SNMP
protocol.
●TELNET
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) can access the device using the TELNET
protocol.
●HTTP
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) can access the device using the HTTP
protocol.
●HTTPS
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) can access the device using the HTTPS
protocol.
●SSH
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) can access the device using the SSH
protocol.
●Px.y
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) can access this device via this port (slot.port).
Steps in configuration
Changing the entry
1. Configure the data of the entry you want to modify.
2. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer the changes to the device.
Creating a new entry
Note
Note that a bad configuration may mean that you can no longer access the device.
You can then only remedy this by resetting the device to the factory defaults and then
reconfiguring.
1. In the "IP Address" input box, enter the IP address of the device and in the "Subnet Mask"
input box the corresponding subnet mask.
2. Click the "Create" button to create a new row in the table.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
296 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
3. Configure the entries of the new row.
4. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer the new entry to the device.
Deleting entries
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Repeat this procedure for every entry you want to delete.
3. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted and the page is updated.
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 The "Security" menu
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 297
Troubleshooting/FAQ 6
6.1 Firmware update via WBM or CLI not possible
Cause
If there is a power failure during the firmware update, it is possible that the IE switch is no
longer accessible using Web Based Management or the Command Line Interface.
Solution
If the IE switch cannot be reached using WBM or CLI, you can download the firmware to your
IE switch using TFTP.
Follow the steps below to load new firmware using TFTP:
1. Turn off the power to the IE switch.
2. Press the Reset button and reconnect the power to the IE switch while holding down the
button.
3. Hold down the button until the red fault LED (F) starts to flash after approximately 30
seconds.
4. Release the button.
The bootloader waits in this state for a new firmware file that you can download by TFTP.
5. Connect a PC via the Ethernet interface with the out-band interface of the IE switch.
6. Assign an IP address to the IE switch with the Primary Setup Tool.
7. In the command prompt, change to the directory where the file with the new firmware is
located and then execute the command "tftp -i <ip address> PUT <firmware>". As an
alternative, you can use a different TFTP client.
Result
The firmware is transferred to the IE switch.
Note
Please note that the transfer of the firmware can take several minutes. During the
transmission, the red error LED (F) flashes.
Once the firmware has been transferred completely to the IE switch, the IE switch is restarted
automatically.
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 299
Index
1
1588, 232
A
Access control, 219, 220
Automatic learning, 220
ACL, 220, 294
Aging
Dynamic MAC Aging, 189
Aging time, 226
Alarm events, 113
Authentication, 121, 280
B
Bridge, 197
Bridge priority, 197
Root bridge, 197
Bridge Max Age, 198
Bridge Max Hop Count, 198
Broadcast, 230
C
Cable test, 160
Class of Service, 168
Collisions, 79
Combo Port Media Type , 141, 144
Configuration mode, 97
CoS, 168
Traffic queue, 168
CoS (Class of Service), 28
C-PLUG
Formatting, 152
Saving the configuration, 152
C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG, 16
CRC, 79
D
DCP server, 96, 213
DHCP
Client, 114
DNS client, 101
DSCP, 169
DST
Daylight saving time, 125, 126
E
E-Mail function, 113
Alarm events, 113
Line monitoring, 113
Error status, 65
Ethernet
Packet Error, 78
Packet size, 76
Packet type, 77
Ethernet statistics
History, 80
Interface statistics, 75
Event log table, 62
Events
Log table, 62
F
Fault monitoring
Connection status change, 146
Redundancy, 148
Filter
Filter configuration, 218
Forward Delay, 198
Fragments, 79
G
Geographic coordinates, 99
Glossary, 10
GMRP, 227
GVRP, 175
H
Hardware version, 61
Hello time, 198
HRP, 192
HTTP
Load/save, 103
HTTPS
Server, 95
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 301
I
IEEE 1588, 232
IGMP, 226
Information
ARP table, 61
LLDP, 84
Log table, 62
Ring redundancy, 71, 73
Spanning Tree, 66
Start page, 55
Versions, 59
IP address, 100
J
Jabbers, 79
K
KEY-PLUG, 149, 153
Formatting, 152
L
LACP, 210
Layer 2, 164
Layer 3, 153, 238
Configuration, 238
Line monitoring, 113
LLDP, 84, 215
Location, 99
Logging on
via HTTP, 53
via HTTPS, 53
Logout
Automatic, 136
Loop, 208
Loop detection, 208
M
MAC ACL, 284, 285
Configuration, 285, 287
Maintenance data, 60
Management ACL, 294
Manufacturer, 60
Mirroring, 183
General, 183
IP Flow, 188
MAC Flow, 187
Port, 185
VLAN, 186
MSTP, 196, 203
Port, 199
Port parameters, 204
MSTP instance, 204, 205
Multicast, 224
Multiple Spanning Tree, 199, 203
N
Near Field Communication, 97
Negotiation, 141
NFC, 97
NTP, 224
Client, 132
O
Order number, 61
OSPF
Area range, 263
Areas, 33, 262
Configuration, 260
Link State Advertisement, 33
OSPFv2 Interfaces, 86, 265
OSPFv2 LSDB (information), 92
OSPFv2 Neighbors, 88
OSPFv2 Virtual Neighbors, 90
Router, 33
Router status, 33
Virtual Links, 268
Oversize, 79
P
Packet error statistics, 78
Password, 276
Ping, 155
PLUG, 153
C-PLUG, (C-PLUG)
KEY-PLUG, (KEY-PLUG)
PNIO, 148
PoE, 156, 158
Port, 158
point-to-point, 40
Port, 142
Port configuration, 140, 144
Port configuration, 142, 144
Index
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
302 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
Port diagnostics
Cable test, 160
SFP diagnostics, 162
Power over Ethernet, 18, 156
Port, 158
Power supply
Monitoring, 145
Priority, 198
PROFINET IO, 148
PST tool, 213
PTP, 232, 233
General, 233
Port, 233
Transparent clock, 233
R
RADIUS, 277
Rate control, 170
Reboot, 102
Redundancy, 191, 192
Redundancy methods
HRP, 41
Redundant networks, 196
Reset, 102
RFC
RFC 1518, 21
Ring redundancy, 191
HRP, 166, 191
MRP, 166, 191
Ring ports, 191
Standby, 192
RIP
RIPv2 Statistics, 93
RIPv2
Configuration, 273
Interfaces, 273
RMON
History, 236
Statistics, 235
Root Max Age, 198
Routing, 32, 243
Routing table, 85
Static routes, 32, 243
VRRP, 32
RSTP, 196
Rule, 284, 285, 288
Configuration, 288
Egress, 287, 288
Ingress, 285, 288
IP ACL, 288
S
Scope of the manual, 9
Security settings, 119
Select/Set button, 137
Serial number, 61
SFP diagnostics, 162
SHA algorithm, 119
SIMATIC NET glossary, 10
SMTP
Client, 96
SNMP, 30, 96, 116, 119
Groups, 119
SNMPv1, 30
SNMPv2c, 30
SNMPv3, 30
Trap, 117
Users, 121
Software version, 61
Spanning tree, 195
MSTP, 196
Passive listening, 207
RSTP, 196
Spanning Tree
Information, 66
Rapid Spanning Tree, 40
SSH
Server, 95
Standby, 192
Standby redundancy, 48
Start page, 55
STEP 7, 213
STP, 196
Subnet
Configuration, 242
Overview, 239
Subnet mask, 21
Syslog, 138
Client, 96
System
Configuration, 95
General information, 98
System event log
Agent, 138
System events
Configuration, 109
Severity filter, 112
Index
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06 303
T
Telnet
Server, 95
TFTP
Load/save, 106
Time, 96
Time of day
Manual setting, 123
Precision Time Protocol, 135
PTP Client, 135
SIMATIC Time Client, 134
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), 129
System time, 123
Time zone, 131
Time-of-day synchronization, 129
UTC time, 131
Time setting, 96
U
Undersize, 79
V
Vendor ID, 61
VLAN, 27, 179
Group, 179
Port VID, 178
Priority, 178
Tag, 178
VLAN ID, 29
VLAN tag, 28
VRRP
Addresses Configuration, 259
Addresses Overview, 258
Backup router, 32
Configuration, 256
Master router, 32
Router, 254
Virtual router, 32
VRRP router, 32
VRRP Statistics, 69
W
Web Based Management, 51
Requirement, 51
Index
SCALANCE XM-400/XR-500 Web Based Management
304 Configuration Manual, 03/2014, C79000-G8976-C248-06
